JP2019058753A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which needs further improvement to prevent mannerism, since a performance to be executed during symbol variation has been widely used.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko game machine, a performance to be executed during symbol variation can be extended up to a period in which symbol variation stopped and displayed, by making the period changeable in which the symbol variation is stopped and displayed after it is finished.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 62

Description

  It is about a pachinko game machine.

  The pachinko game machine that is most widely spread at present is called "special symbol" (or main game symbol) on the display unit such as 7-segment when the game ball enters the start opening (start chucker). Symbol is variably displayed, and when the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the special gaming state in which the player has a higher profit state than the normal gaming state {the special winning opening in the closed state at the normal time It is a model of a type (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game of contents opened by a predetermined condition (a so-called attacker). Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol directly linked to the player's profit, it is called "decorative symbol" for effect to enhance the interest of the game separately from the "special symbol" described above. The symbol to be displayed is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in synchronization with the variation of the special symbol. Then, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also begins to change accordingly, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also according to this, a predetermined mode (for example, It will stop at "777". Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is determined by the decorative symbol being stopped in a predetermined manner.

  Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, how to devise a high level of interest with regard to overall production including the variation pattern of the above-mentioned pattern, in order to differentiate from other types. It is focused on whether to grant.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-158382 JP 2010-110479 JP 2011-156039 JP 2011-156041 A

  However, since the rendition method performed during symbol variation has been widely used conventionally, there is a problem that the control method needs to be further improved in order to improve the interest.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
And a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number, and the stop display mode of the first identification information and the variation display mode of the first identification information First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed on the basis of the second random number, and the stop display mode of the second identification information and the variation display mode of the second identification information Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term,
A period during which the first identification information is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period from the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed is a period during which the first identification information is variably displayed within the predetermined period. The first identification information display fixed period, which is a period when the condition can not be newly satisfied, and the second identification information is maintained for a specified period from the time when the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A second identification information display fixed period in which the variable display start condition of the second identification information can not be newly satisfied within the specific period.
The first identification information display fixed period provided when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first identification information display fixed period provided in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be a different period.
<Supplementary Note>
In addition, although listed about another aspect different from this aspect below, it is possible to implement without being limited to these at all.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
And an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, the random number temporary storage means (temporarily stores the first and second random numbers) which temporarily stores the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C),
When the variable display start condition of identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the change display manner of the stop display mode of identification information and the identification information Game content determination means (eg, game content determination means MN) for determining
Identification information display control means (for example, a first one) for controlling to stop the identification information after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit according to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN) · A second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C),
A period during which the identification information is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period from when the identification information is displayed in a stopped state, and the variation display start condition of the identification information is newly satisfied within the predetermined period. An identification information display fixed period, which is an impossible period, is provided.
The game contents scheduled when the variable display start condition of the identification information about the certain hold is satisfied are determined in advance before the variable display start condition of the identification information about the certain hold is satisfied after the certain hold occurs. Pachinko is characterized in that it is possible to vary the identification information display fixed period provided before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding the certain hold based on the result of the prior determination. It is a gaming machine.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect, it is possible to improve the control method relating to the effect performed during the symbol change.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main gaming symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the on-hold information management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the second main game winning combination prefetching determination process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of pre-reading pending content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of limit frequency A variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main gaming symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of first main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of second main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of pre-reading executing effect content determination processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of second main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of effect mode determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of limited frequency type determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of a variable additional time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flow chart of fluctuation fixed time determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing during an additional time on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a variation fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The term "entry" includes not only winnings where the winning balls are paid out, but also passing to "through chuckers" where there is no winning balls paid out. The "opened state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = no prize in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called, attacker). It will be easy. Also, for example, a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) projected from the game board (the player side) and a state (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state) retracted into the game board (opposite to the player side) In a configuration (so-called Vero type attacker) capable of taking the above condition, the advancing state = the winning easy state, and the retreating state = the winning non-easiness state. The "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko gaming machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to narrow random numbers (for example, hard as random numbers Random number, soft random number as pseudo random number). For example, the so-called "basic random number" affecting the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning lottery)" associated with the transition of the special game, the variation pattern (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined "Variation mode decision random number" for doing, "symbol decision random number" which decides stop pattern, and "per hit symbol decision random number" which decides whether or not to shift to specific game (for example probability fluctuation game) after special game be able to. When determining the content of the variation mode or the content of the fixed identification information, it is not necessary to use all these random numbers, and at least one random number which is the same as or different from each other may be used. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once in the entrance (for example, starting entrance) which is a trigger for acquiring random numbers. The random number acquired by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as a winning random number + a variation mode determination random number + a symbol determination random number ... is referred to as a single random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also be another type of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The “gaming state” is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state from a non-probability fluctuation gaming state where the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Transition game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning to start slot that becomes transition lottery to special game (so-called, normal symbol time reduction state, for example, variable members are attached to the start slot In the case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open winning probability of the variable member is high, the notification time of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short, and so on. "The average value is uniform regardless of the number of reservations" means that the fluctuation time is selected without depending on the number of reservations, but as other prescribed contents, for example, it relates to (1) loss In the stop design "HA", the first difference appears in the average of the fluctuation time average value with the number of reservations a and the average value of the fluctuation time with the number of reservations b which is the number of reservations larger than the number of reservations a In the pattern "HB", there is no difference between the average of the fluctuation time in the number of reservations a and the average of the fluctuation time in the number of reservations b, or the second difference is more than the first difference, and the second (2) is assigned to all variation modes that can be selected at the time of the stop symbol “HA” related to the loss at the number of reservations c (for example, four numbers of reservations), which is smaller than the first difference. Random number range assigned to the most easily selected variation mode in random number range The occupancy rate is the occupancy rate α, and it is the easiest to be selected in the random number range assigned to all the variation modes that can be selected at the stop symbol “HB” related to the loss with the number of reservations c (for example, 4) Assuming that the ratio occupied by the random number range allocated for the variation mode is the occupancy rate β, the occupancy rate α is higher than the occupancy rate β (that is, the most easily selected variation modes are concentrated and selected Easy) value.

The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 first type compound machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (eg, conventional pachinko gaming machines such as conventional type 1, type 2, type 3 and general electronic combination). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function of each means, the on / off timing of the flag, and the means name etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the embodiments and modifications described above should not be construed as limiting as applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table regarding various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

  Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines are mainly composed of gaming machine slots and gaming boards. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame aligned with the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be able to open and close via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or recovering the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the launch rail, and removing the game balls from the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and sound effects are output according to the gaming state and the like.

  Next, in the game board, a game area D30 partitioned by the outer rail D32 and the inner rail D34 is formed. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills not shown and various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, 1st large winning opening C10, 2nd large winning opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 is provided with a first main game start port entering ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start slot entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry Generate ball entry information.

  Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric role object B11d. Here, the second main game start slot entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the second main game start slot B10, and indicates the second main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game start port electric role B11d changes into a closed state in which the game ball is less likely to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are arranged to overlap, and the presence of the first main game start opening A10 makes the second main game start. The upper part of the game start port B10 is closed. In addition, both the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area D30) are the first main game start opening A10. And it is comprised so that it may be induced | guided | derived to 2nd main game starting opening B10.

  In the present embodiment, although the electric bonus is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric bonus is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are disposed to overlap vertically, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first main game start opening You may be comprised so that A10 and 2nd main game starting opening B10 may be spaced apart and arrange | positioned. In such a configuration, a member that blocks the upper portion of the second main game start opening electric combination B11 d may be provided. Also, while the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the middle of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10, and the game area D30 is The game ball flowing down the right side (based on the middle of the game area) may be configured to be easily guided to the second main game start opening B10 while being hard to be guided to the first main game start opening A10. In addition, "it is easy to be induced" and "it is hard to be induced" are determined by the size of the number of balls when 10000 balls are respectively emitted to the right and left sides of the game ball, for example.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start slot entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start slot H10, and generates the auxiliary game start slot entrance information indicating the ball entry when entering the ball. Do. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric winning combination B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball that flows down the right side (the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily induced in the auxiliary game start port H10, and the game ball that flows down the left side of the game area D30 is Although it is configured to be hard to be induced {but not limited to this, the configuration is such that gaming balls flowing down the left side (based on the middle of the gaming region) of the gaming region D30 are easily guided to the auxiliary gaming start port H10 (For example, the auxiliary game start port H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are disposed in the upper right of the out port D36 so as to overlap with each other, and flow down the right side (based on the center of the gaming area) of the gaming area D30. The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out slot D36.

Next, the first large winning opening C10 forms a horizontal rectangular shape that opens when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. A winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the out opening D36 and below the second large winning opening C20. Specifically, the first large winning opening C10 is a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first large winning opening electric combination C11d (and the first large winning). And a mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entering ball information indicating the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The first big winning opening electric winning combination C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 to the first big winning opening C10 in the normal state where the gaming ball can not win or difficult to win and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win (first (1) The large winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called (Velo type attacker), which is preferable when it is desired to secure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second large winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. A winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the second large winning opening electric combination C21d (and the second large winning And a mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening entering ball information showing the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric winning combination C21d, in the second big winning opening C20 the game ball can not be winning or difficult to win the normal state and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win the second big winning opening C20 Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called (Velo type attacker), which is preferable when it is desired to secure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (the second main game) Is an apparatus that executes the displayed information. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and the first main game And a symbol hold display unit A21 h (a second main game symbol hold display unit B21 h). Here, the first main game symbol holding display area A21h (the second main game symbol holding display area B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game) Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol not being executed). In addition, 1st main game symbol display part A21g (2nd main game symbol display part B21g) is comprised by 7 segment LED, for example, and 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) is "0"-"9. "10" numbers displayed with "" and lost "-" {However, not limited to this, 7-segment LED is used to make it difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of reservations is not limited to four lamps, and the maximum number of reservations can be displayed (for example, one lamp can be displayed. Number 1: lighted, pending number 2: low-speed blinking, pending number 3: medium-speed blinking, pending number 4: high-speed blinking, if configured).

  In the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), because the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) does not have to have a dramatic role. The size of is set so as not to be noticeable. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) itself has an effective role and the first decorative symbol (the second decorative symbol) is not displayed, the effect to be described later The first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes display or the like of a effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol / second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the change display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information, and a moving image of a decorative symbol variation of a plurality of rows imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying the In the present embodiment, the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display, but may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four lamps, which are linked to the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding display unit H21 h is configured of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of holdings of the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation (the number of auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a channel of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays an effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the entire operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular, controls the entire game operation such as lottery when entering the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10) (ie, the game Control board M that performs control directly related to the benefit of the person and effect control means (sub main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, prize ball tank KT, prize ball rail KR, and game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the winning on each winning hole D20 A prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 or the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (storage ball) of the upper bowl D20 To area D30 Launch device D42 that launches each ball, launch control board D40 that controls the launch operation of launcher D42, power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine, and power on / off pachinko game machine A power switch Ea or the like which is a switch is provided on the back of the front frame D14 (opposite to the game side).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the payout of gaming balls is performed based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M to control the award ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbol, sound from the speaker D24, A sub control board S (in this example, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are disposed on one board) which controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26 and the execution of an error notification etc. And a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board. Here, the sub control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative symbol, sounds from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and an error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that executes display processing such as variation display / stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG, suspension display, and advance notice display. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub main control unit SM, and the sub sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that pre-stores a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, A RAM for temporarily storing data (such as various data generated during a game and a computer program read from a ROM) handled by the computer is mounted. Here, although not particularly illustrated, in the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent writing of a program or the like modified due to a fraudulent action, it is configured not to provide an unused area. It is preferable (for example, filling unused areas with all 0's, filling used areas at a young address, etc.). Also, in order to prevent reference to data that is not normally referred to due to noise or fraud, unused data (for example, data used in gaming machines with different specifications or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable to configure so as not to provide Similarly, when using the area of the RAM, it is preferable that the area is used by filling the area at a young address and that an unused program area is not provided. The outline configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection between each substrate and device will be outlined below.

  First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the aforementioned first main game start opening ball insertion detection device A11s, the second main game start opening ball insertion detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening ball insertion detection device H11s, the first 1 large winning opening winning detection device C11s, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s, a general winning detection device (not shown, but with a general ball entry, there is a winning ball, but not a lottery for entering a symbol) ), Drive solenoids (not shown, such as the first big winning opening solenoid C13, the second big winning opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the winning ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub main control unit SM and sub sub control unit SS), and based on the game progress, the prize balls are paid out. The information (commands) relating to etc. is configured to be able to be transmitted to the winning ball payout control board KH, and the information (commands) relating to the presentation / playing state of the game etc to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like through an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected by wiring with the hall computer HC through the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game related information to an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub main control unit SM (the communication method may use either serial communication or parallel communication). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls and a device that can be operated by a player, and receives a request for lending of game balls and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R to be transmitted. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launcher is additionally provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launcher (launch handle, launch motor, ball feed device) Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is adopted separately as a form adjacent to the game machine, but may be integrated with the game machine, in which case, it is rented by the prize ball payout control board KH. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

Next, the sub control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative symbol etc. as described above, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and a drive device (not shown) for other effects. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are provided in the sub control substrate S, and the control of sound to be output from the speaker D24 by the sub main control unit SM Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub control substrate S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate substrate Although it may be possible, a merit of being able to reduce the situation where noise mixes in space merit, wiring, etc. arises by being configured to be integrated. Further, the work assignment in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable in the case where a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted). Also, electronic value may be given without giving a physical award ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) involved in the effect, a prize ball payout control board KH performing payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, and information communicably connected ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps) and the speakers D24. It is connected. Furthermore, the prize ball payout control substrate KH is electrically connected to a prize ball dispenser KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. And ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. The respective units included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (apparatus) will be described.

  First, the main control board M is a game information control means MJ for controlling acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. Game progress means MP in charge of the current and past gaming state [eg, main gaming related state {normal gaming state, specific gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening gaming state), special gaming state}, status related to auxiliary gaming (Easy open state, non easy open state), stop symbol and fluctuation mode information related to the main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, gaming state during special game (for example, round number and winning number information) Game status temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing etc., and various game information {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 16R big hit, 8R big hit, 4 on the gaming peripheral device side Information transmission control means MT (and unsent command is stored to transmit information relating to the big hit, loss}, fluctuation mode (eg, fluctuation time), special game start signal / state information / end signal, hold information etc.) Buffer for command transmission buffer MT10, and a prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling a prize ball payout control board KH to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on the winning of the gaming ball to various winning openings There is.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines the ball entry determination means MJ 10 for determining the inflow of the game ball to each ball entry port (starting port etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be acquired. The random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 20 for acquiring the respective random numbers based on the above, and the holding control means MJ 30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting opening during the variable display as the holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. In addition, the game progress means MP, directly to the open and close decision of the display control means MP10 for performing control to display the fluctuation and stop display of each symbol, and the second main game start opening electric role object B11d of the second main game start opening B10 The second main game start opening electric role opening and closing control means MP20-B for performing various processing related, special game control means MP30 to control the special game advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first main With regard to the game and the second main game and the auxiliary game, the first big winning without determination of which game state to shift the current game state, and the transition of the game state (probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening gaming state) It has small hitting game control means MP40 which manages execution of the small hitting game which can open mouth C10, and specified game control means MP50 for performing processing which changes a game state based on the decision concerned. Each means will be described in detail below.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first main game start slot A10. The first main game start slot entry ball determination means MJ11-A and the second main game start slot The second main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-B to determine whether the game ball has entered the ball B10, and the auxiliary game start slot to determine whether the game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start slot H10 In the first large winning opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10, and the second large winning opening C20, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first large winning opening C10. It has 2nd big winning a prize entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20 which determines whether a game ball entered a ball.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball to the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result To the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A which acquires a random number (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start opening B10 It is determined whether to acquire the second main game random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main according to the determination result The second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B to acquire the game pattern determination random number etc.), and whether to acquire the auxiliary gaming side selected random number, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result And RJ random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H There.

  Here, “the random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above includes, for example, “0” to “65535” or “assigned according to the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determination random number) It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number is not limited to a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo random number generated by hardware random number, software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method (plus one method) in which the values are sequentially expressed along the random number sequence, the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value There may be mentioned a method (initial value update method) in which)) is determined by a value having chance, a combination of these, and the like. By acquiring random numbers in this manner, it is possible to generate non-periodic random numbers that are unlikely to be expected by the player. Conversely, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 controls the process related to the hold digest and the change start, and the first main game random number obtained in the situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been lowered. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, and the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number on the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission is obtained based on the judgment result. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main gaming side random number acquired in a situation where the second main gaming symbol variation permission has not been lowered, and based on the determination result, the symbol variation permission is given to the random number. The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game obtained in the situation where the auxiliary game symbol variation permission has not come down Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for determining whether or not to temporarily store a random number, and holding the random number on the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H based on the determination result until the symbol variation permission is obtained. And.

  Here, the reserve / termination control means MJ 31 has a fluctuation start condition satisfaction judging means MJ 31 j which judges whether or not the condition for starting fluctuation is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four pieces, combining the random numbers with the holding order The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, for temporary storage in a fixed form. Have.

Next, the game content determination means MN determines whether the special game is successful or not and the second main game start opening electric role B11
d whether or not to open a special game transition decision means MN20 (for example, to internally turn on the hit flag) to determine the transition to the special game if it is a hit as a result of the win lottery Symbol content determination means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of each symbol based on each random number It has limited frequency change mode determination means MN52 which determines the change mode (a change time etc.) of the main game symbol at the time of the limit frequency mentioned later. Here, the lottery means MN10 is a first main game winning lottery with respect to the first main game symbol MN11-A, and a second main game winning lottery means performing a second lottery regarding the second main game symbol It has an MN11-B, and an auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a lottery on the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game success or failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success or failure lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success or failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a success or failure lottery regarding the first main game symbol. First main gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, second main gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a 2nd main gaming symbol winning lottery, and a winning / drawing lottery on an auxiliary gaming symbol , And each has a subsidiary gaming lottery table MN11ta-H to be referred to when performing the game. In addition, limitation frequency fluctuation mode decision expedient MN52 is the table which is referred when deciding the fluctuation feature which relates to the main game design at the time of limitation frequency, the fluctuation frequency etc of the main game symbol after the game state and the special game end The reference table of the limited frequency variation mode determination made of a plurality of tables configured to determine the table to be referred to by the table 52t, and at the time of the limited frequency A, which table of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta is referred to Limit frequency counter AMN 52c which counts the number of times of fluctuation of the main game design after the special game end in order to decide or which table of lottery table MN52ta for limit frequency fluctuation mode decision when referring to limit frequency B Limit frequency to count the number of changes of the main game symbol from the end of the special game to determine the A pointer BMN52c-2, has a limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b for temporarily storing information relating to limited frequency (the flag on or off, etc.). When the limitation frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limitation frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table When MN51ta-B) is referenced, (1) the selectivity of the variation mode is different with reference to the common table (ie, the variation aspect to be selected is the same but the selectivity is different), (2) Although the variation mode and the selection rate to be selected are the same, another fixed value is added to the variation time value according to the selected variation mode, (3) different variation mode {first main game variation mode (4) All variations that can be selected There is a variation mode} which does not exist in the lottery table for determination MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) May be configured to like is different. An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, with the limited frequency, the type and / or the selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. And / or selectivity is a state (limited frequency state, that is, a state in which a special variation pattern table is selected only in a particular variation period). In addition, as a trigger to become a limited frequency state, in addition to the specific symbol stopping, opening of the big winning opening, stopping of the symbol (big hit symbol, small hitting symbol, etc.) which becomes opening trigger of the big winning opening, there is a timing It is good also as progress of a predetermined number of times of change, etc. from (timing of change start after stop, etc. after specific symbol stop). In addition, with the special fluctuation pattern table, each gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state and non time shortening gaming state, non probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, non probability fluctuation game The main gaming table 3 referred to in the state and non-time shortening gaming state) (not only referred to within the limited period in the current gaming state, but the next big hit in the current gaming state, a small hit or a specific symbol It is a lottery table for variation mode determination other than the variation mode determination lottery table referred to until the stop time. In addition, from the state that refers to the lottery table MN52ta for limitation frequency variation mode determination, from now on, limitation time (especially the one with the state that the second main game start port electric role B11d is easy to open is limited When the frequency A, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is a state involving a state that is difficult to open may be referred to as limited frequency B), limited frequency state, limited frequency, and the like.

  Here, when executing the winning or losing lottery based on the main gaming random number, the winning or not lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main gaming random number value is the same value as any of the per random number values, or If part or all of the random number is a continuous number, the main game random number is judged to be equal to or lower than the upper limit of the random number and to be equal to or higher than the lower limit, thereby executing the propriety determination. . By executing such a propriety determination, accurate determination processing can be performed. On the other hand, when performing a yes / no determination by comparison with only the upper limit of the random number range or with only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, 0 or 0 when the range of random numbers is 0 to 1023 Since it is necessary to set 1023) as the random number value, it becomes vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of sending current to the main control board M and all the bits in the storage area become 0 or 1 easily) There is a risk of Also, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery {If a plurality of random numbers are used in one lottery (so-called two-step lottery is performed), two random numbers are used Because it is necessary to prevent it from being synchronized}.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 obtains the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A which determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B which determines the stop pattern of the second main game symbol based on the determined game content determination random number (the second main game random number) and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining the stop symbol pertaining to the first main game symbol, The said 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A is provided with various lottery tables which differ according to a success / failure result and a game state (For example, regarding a game state, it is for normal game → 1st main game normal game state Lottery table, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for first main game probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening game → lottery table for first main game time shortening gaming state). In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B to be referred to when determining the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to the result of the success or the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game state lottery Table, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for second main game probability fluctuation game state, time shortening game → lottery table for second main game time shortening game state). An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H has a lottery table MN41ta-H for determining an auxiliary gaming symbol to be referred to when deciding the stop symbol pertaining to the auxiliary gaming symbol, and the lottery for determining the auxiliary gaming symbol The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables which differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary gaming regular lottery table, probability fluctuation gaming and time shortening gaming → auxiliary gaming time shortening lottery table).

  Next, the first main game variation mode determination means for determining the variation mode (such as variation time) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (the first main game random number). A second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B that determines a variation mode (a variation time etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the MN51-A and the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number); It has an auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern based on the acquired auxiliary game pattern winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A which is referred to when determining the variation mode according to the first main game symbol Yes, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to the success or failure result · gaming state (for example, for the gaming state, normal game → first main game normal Lottery table for gaming state, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for first main gaming probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening game → lottery table for first main gaming time shortening gaming state). Also, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B to be referred to when determining the variation mode according to the second main game symbol , The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B is provided with various lottery tables different according to the success or failure result · gaming state (for example, for the game state, normal game → second main game normal game Lottery table for state, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for second main game probability fluctuation game state, time reduction game → lottery table for second main game time reduction game state). An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for determining an auxiliary game variation mode, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode The lottery table for determination MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables which differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary gaming regular lottery table, probability fluctuation game and time shortening gaming → auxiliary gaming time shortening lottery table).

  Next, the display control means MP10 is for a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display area A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display area B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C that performs stop display after changing the first main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, for a predetermined time assistance It has the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H which performs control which carries out stop display after changing a game symbol.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C have a first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) which can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, in order to determine whether the second main game start opening electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B satisfies the condition for performing the process of opening and closing the second main game start opening electric combination B11d The second main game start opening electric combination opening and closing condition determination means MP21-B, the second main game start opening electric combination opening timer MP22t to measure the drive (open) time of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d And 有 し B.

  Next, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the conditions for shifting to the special game are satisfied, and if the special game transition conditions are satisfied, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the special game content determination means MP32 to determine the special winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) to open the mouth C10 or the second large winning opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processing related to the special game (for example, the first large winning opening And a special game time management means MP34 for performing C10 and opening / closing time of the second large winning opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 and the first and second big winning opening electric role opening and closing control means MP33-C to open and close the first large winning opening electric role C11d and the second large winning opening electric position C21d There is a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls to the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. Further, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta to be referred to when specifying the contents of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table The details of (not shown).

  Next, small hitting game control means MP40, small hitting game timer MP41t which measures the opening time of the 1st big winning a prize mouth C10 in small hitting game, small hitting game related information which remembers the information which relates to the small hitting game temporarily And temporary storage means MP40b.

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the termination condition of the probability variation gaming state is satisfied, and whether the termination condition of the time shortening gaming state is satisfied or not. When it is determined that the short game termination condition determination means MP52 is included. Here, the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 has a time reduction counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction. Here, the “specific game” is, for example, a probability variation game in which the lottery probability for the special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is relatively shortened compared to the non-time shortening gaming in progress (time shortening function). Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the open extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (open time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main gaming symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main gaming symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability fluctuation gaming without time limit restriction) except for). That is, the time reduction number is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. In addition, the above-mentioned probability variation game end condition judging means MP51 and time saving game end condition judging means MP52, for example, the transition lottery from specified game (for example probability fluctuation game and time shortening game) to normal game at predetermined probability every time of symbol fluctuation May have a function to perform (in the case of a so-called pachinko gaming machine having a fall lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes a first main game (a game from a change of a first main game symbol to a stop) and a second main game (a change of a second main game symbol to a stop) First and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current gaming state in the game), and auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current gaming state in the auxiliary game H and special game related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB 20 b and the current game state (for example, the number of remaining time short, the various flags related to the specific game, etc.) in the specific game Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C is a stop related to the first or second main gaming symbol (the first or second main gaming symbol for which the variation start condition is established) in the current fluctuation. It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbol and variation mode information.

  In addition, the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H is the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol related to the auxiliary gaming symbol currently being changed (the auxiliary gaming symbol for which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, gaming peripherals will be described. Note that some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, so the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the gaming peripherals are a first main gaming peripheral A which is a peripheral of the first main gaming side, a second main gaming peripheral B which is a peripheral of the second main gaming side, and a first main gaming side The first and second main game common peripheral device C, which is a common peripheral device on the second main game side, an auxiliary game peripheral device H regarding an auxiliary game, a sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, and a sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like are included. Here, the effects controlled by the sub main control unit SM include the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the variation of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol, in the result of the game. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A is a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can perform stop display and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B is a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of the second main game start port B10, which is a trigger for transition to a special game, and the second main game symbol stop display and variable display. And.

  Next, the first and second main game common peripheral devices C are in the closed state at the time of the normal game, and in the special game (big hit), the first big winning opening C10 which is opened under the predetermined condition And the second large winning opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming peripheral device H is an auxiliary gaming start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d of the second main game starting opening B10, and a stop indication and change indication of the auxiliary gaming symbol. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that can be played.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub main control unit) SM is a display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, determination processing of effect contents relating to effect display, and display control processing And an information transmission / reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS. The respective means will be described in detail below.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11 b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information concerning the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decoration symbol display control means SM21 which controls the variation pattern of the decoration symbol and the determination processing of the stop symbol and the display control processing, and a drawing hold which manages the number of holdings of the decoration symbol and the hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 for executing pre-hold look-ahead effect, background effect display control means SM23 for managing background image determination processing and display control processing, and notice effect content determination processing, A preview effect display control means SM24 for controlling the display control process and a reach effect display control means SM25 for determining the reach effect contents determination process and the display control process are included.

  Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 relates to the display display content determination means SM21n for determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol based on the information from the main control board M side and the symbol variation of the decorative symbol. Mounting display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and a drawing variation time management timer SM21t for measuring the variation time of the decoration symbol ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM 21 n further includes a drawing (reference) table SM 21 ta for determination of the drawing variation content to be referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table) Not shown).

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding the hold related to the decorative symbol.

  Next, the holding pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 determines holding pre-reading effect executability whether or not holding pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k, and pre-reading related information temporary storage means SM26 b for temporarily storing the information related to the holding pre-reading ,have.

  Next, on the basis of the information from the main control board M, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the information relating to the background effect display, and the background effect display content determining means SM23n which determines the display content of the background effect. Background production related information for temporary storage means SM23b, and stay stage {group of effect systems, and different stay stages result in different (or different) notice effects, background effects, reach effects, sound modes, etc. Of the awakening stage, the awakening stage stay counter SM23c that measures the number of changes in the awakening stage, and the staying stage of the demonic stage. If there is a devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 that measures the number of changes that stay in the "devil stage". .

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines, based on the information from the main control board M, the display contents and display timing of the notice effect, etc. The temporary presentation related information temporary storage means SM 24 b for temporarily storing the information.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines reach display content determination means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the reach effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and information related to the reach effect display And the reach production related information temporary storage means SM 25 b for temporarily storing

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is a sub information transmission / reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub main control unit SM, and an image display for displaying an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG And control means SS20. Here, the image display control unit SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage unit SS21b for temporarily storing information related to display of commands and various images received from the sub main control unit SM side.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG which displays an image concerning the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub sub control unit ) SS is connected to the secondary game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control Means (sub main control unit) means to be controlled by SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

From here, an example of the flow of a general process in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (shown as rectangles), judgments (shown as diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown as rounded rectangles) indicating start / end / return etc. . Also, in the case where the details of the processing steps are illustrated in another flowchart, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (shown as a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, at the development stage of the gaming machine, it is also carried out to simultaneously develop gaming machines with different specifications, but in this example, the subroutine executed by the gaming machines with different specifications in the processing on the main side ( It is configured so as not to leave a subroutine not normally used, and prevents processing relating to an unused subroutine that is not normally executed due to noise or cheating.

  First, FIG. 5 is a main flow chart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. That is, after power on of the gaming machine, after performing initialization (not shown), the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button in step 1002, and resets the power supply unit E reset button (RAM clear It is determined whether or not the manager of the game arcade has intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the side of the main control board M (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at that timing) At this timing, a command may be set and may be configured to be transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, it is stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at the time of power interruption) Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether the content of the RAM is not normal (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is correctly backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the above-described RAM clear process). On the other hand, if the result of step 1010 is NO, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M in step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the corresponding timing, or the command is set at the corresponding timing to be described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is allowed to be T) {as a result, when the execution fixed interrupt timing is reached, the diagram (b) is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After the step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, an increment process of the random number counter) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  In addition, it is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured not to be a value at which the special game is executed (noise or cheating immediately after the processing of the program starts). By doing this, in order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the processing for determining the execution of the special game is executed).

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 7B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt every approximately 1.5 ms), at step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes a motorized product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, at step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes special game control processing described later. Next, at step 1800, the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (in particular, the winning ball payout determining means MH) performs a winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball dispensing device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening on which the gaming ball has won. A process for causing the payout control board KH to execute and managing the result is executed. Next, at step 1998, the main control board M executes output processing of an external signal (output of information to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC or the like). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (sends the command set in each process described above to the sub main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing which had been done. In the control command transmission process, the order in which the sub main control unit SM receives the commands is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command) Since there is a case, the command is configured to be transmitted in the order in which the main control board M determines to transmit the command (in the order in which the command is set).

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the process of FIG. Be done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power-off time information (for example, checksum) based on the information of the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area and prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, at step 1102, the auxiliary game start opening ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (flow in, in the case of a gate, passage). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21 -H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32 b -H, and the hold ball is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces) Determine if In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ 32-H holds the holding ball in the form of setting the random number in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H together with the information indicating the number of the second holding. Is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). Also in the case of No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, at step 1202, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and the electric combination open flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation flag is off. Do. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H, and determines whether or not there is a holding ball regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and refers to the gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side (flag state of auxiliary game time short flag). While acquiring, with reference to the lottery table MN41ta-H for auxiliary game symbol determination, the stop design is decided on the basis of the game state of the said auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number which is based on the retention sphere (for example, auxiliary game time short flag Is selected, the winning symbol is selected with high probability as compared to the case where it is turned off), and the temporary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H is temporarily stored. Next, at step 1218, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H is based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (the auxiliary gaming time short flag flag state), the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C of the auxiliary gaming symbol A predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time short flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball relating to the auxiliary gaming symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variation display of the auxiliary gaming symbol on the auxiliary gaming symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, at step 1224, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol has been reached. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H in step 1226 to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol, and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, at step 1228, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, at step 1230, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit". In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B is the second main game based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of auxiliary game time short flag) A predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds if the auxiliary game time short flag is on, 0.5 if the auxiliary game time short flag is off, for example, the auxiliary game time short flag is on) Set the second). Next, at step 1234, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B turns on the electric combination open flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B opens the second main game start opening electric combination B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start opening electric combination open timer MP22t-B, at the open time of the electric combination. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B closes the second main game start opening electric combination B11 d and the auxiliary gaming state is temporary. In the flag area of the storage means MB10-H, the motorized part open flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If NO in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238. If NO in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If NO in step 1206, step 1224 or step 1230, the next process It transfers to (the process of step 1300).

Moreover, in this flowchart, after the stop symbol display in step 1226 for convenience, although it transfers to the following step immediately after, it is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to shift to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing the branch process using the stop display fixed flag and the timer). Is achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-A is the first main game start slot entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start slot entrance information Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A, and the main game (especially the first main game Side) determines whether the holding ball for the side is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A acquires a first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as a first main game content determination random number, a lottery random number for determining success or failure, a symbol lottery random number for determining a symbol when hit, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of variation mode lottery random number to be acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, respectively, and are obtained sequentially at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ 32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the suspension control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the special game execution flag and the small hit execution flag Is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1310, the hold control means MJ 30 determines in step 1312 whether or not the main game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the holding control means MJ 30 determines in advance the result and the stop symbol relating to the stored holding based on the holding information (the winning random number and the symbol determination random number). Next, at step 1316, the hold control means MJ30 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command regarding the newly generated hold yes / no result and the stop symbol information to the sub main control unit SM (step It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the process shifts to step 1318. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the information related to the stop symbol determined in advance is configured to be transmitted to the sub side, the "HA" that the determination result in advance is the stop symbol related to the loss of the first main game In the case of “HB” and in the case of “HB”, commands relating to different stop symbols will be sent to the sub side (as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of stop symbols relating to lost) ing).

  Next, in step 1318, the suspension control means MJ30, based on the suspension information (random number for variation mode determination), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group (non-short time variation mode group and time variation mode) It is determined in advance (for the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode group, refer to the main gaming table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIGS. 14 to 17). In the present embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 executes a command (a hold generation command of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number division information, etc.) related to the new hold generation, the sub main control unit SM. To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to (to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and proceeds to step 1322. In addition, when it is comprised so that symbol information may be transmitted to a sub side like this embodiment, the production which suggests a big hit may be performed as a production performed by a sub side, and when it is set as such composition, It is desirable to be able to notify the player of the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol to be the big hit (informing the stop symbol only when the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol is a big hit). Also, in the case of No in step 1302, step 1304, step 1310 or step 1312, the processing shifts to step 1322.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when the hold occurs), the fluctuation mode random number division information, the fluctuation mode group Are configured to determine

  It should be noted that the main game content determination random number information, the pass / fail random number delimiter information, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub side at the timing when the hold occurs, but further, the sub side Information to be sent to is not limited to this, information related to the stop symbol of the main game symbol, information related to the profit mode of the main game symbol to be a big hit (the number of rounds of special games according to the main game symbol to be stopped, etc. ), The number of reservations immediately after the holding winnings (only the number of holdings on the first main gaming side or the second main gaming side that has won the prize, or the number of holdings on both the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side may be used) May be configured to be able to transmit information pertaining to, etc. {Convenient random number division information refers to the respective gaming states on the first main game side (second main game side) and random value (or random value range) And the success and failure lottery results, and grouping It is one of the random number division information, for example, a probability change gaming state, a non-probability change gaming state, a loss, a probability change gaming state or a non-probability change gaming state, hit, probability If it is a fluctuation gaming state, it is a hit, but if it is a non-probability fluctuation gaming state, a grouping such as a loss can be mentioned}.

  Next, in step 1322, the second main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-B is operated from the second main game start slot entrance detector B11s of the second main game start slot B10. It is determined whether the information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1322, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B in step 1324, and the main game (especially the second main game Side) determines whether the holding ball for the side is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). In the case of Yes in step 1324, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B acquires a second main game content determination random number in step 1326. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, similarly to the first main game content determination means, three random numbers of success lottery random number, symbol lottery random number, and variation aspect lottery random number are acquired. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the lottery random number for the first main game and the lottery random number for the second main game Acquisition range of) is set to the same. Next, in step 1328, the second main game symbol holding means MJ 32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B. . Next, in step 1330, the suspension control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag It is determined whether the is on. In the case of Yes in step 1330, in step 1334, the suspension control means MJ 30 determines in advance the result and the symbol of suspension regarding the stored suspension based on the suspension information (the lottery random number and the symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1336, the hold control means MJ30 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command regarding the newly generated hold yes / no result and the stop symbol information to the sub main control unit SM (step It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the process shifts to step 1338.

  In the case of No at step 1330, the hold control means MJ30 determines at step 1332 whether or not the main game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. In the case of Yes in step 1332, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1332, the process moves to step 1334.

Next, in step 1338, the suspension control means MJ30, based on the suspension information (random number for variation mode determination), stores the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group (non-short time variation mode group and time variation mode) The group) is determined in advance (for the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode group, refer to the main gaming table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIG. 14 to FIG. 17). Next, in step 1340, the hold control means MJ 30 executes a command related to the new hold generation (a hold generation command of the second main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number division information, etc.) To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to (to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1400). Also in the case of No in step 1322 or step 1324, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400).

  Incidentally, although storage of the first main game content determination random number and storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed in steps 1308 and 1328, the main game content determination random number is stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board. In the case of storing a memory, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte storing the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers It is preferable to configure so as not to store other information such as a value (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, the information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise etc. To prevent it). In addition, with regard to the lottery random number, the change in the gaming state (the gaming state relating to the suspension recorded already) is obtained during the period from when the lottery random number is obtained to when the lottery for the Not only the change but also a change in the gaming state may occur due to the newly generated suspension, so the gaming state at the time of the execution of the lottery for the lottery random number may be unpredictable. It is comprised so that the said lottery random number may be memorize | stored until it performs. In this embodiment, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the command to the sub main control unit SM related to the information on suspension can be transmitted only at the time of holding occurrence according to the first main game, but in the time shortening gaming state Although it was configured to be able to transmit only at the hold occurrence according to the second main game, regardless of which gaming state is the hold related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game The command may be configured to be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether to use the received command. In addition, a specific example of the command related to the pass / fail result information to be sent to the sub main control unit SM is “D000H: Missing, D001H: Missing with low confidence, Hit with high confidence, D002H: Hit with both low confidence and high confidence, D003H : A small hit, and a specific example of a command related to stop symbol information to be sent to the sub main control unit SM is "D100H: 16R per variation, D101H: 16R non per variation, D102H: 2R per variation", sub A specific example of the command related to the variation mode random number division information to be transmitted to the main control unit SM is “D 200 H: division 1 (group 1 if time reduction gaming state, group 1 if non-time reduction gaming state, group 1 if limited frequency state) , D201H: break 2 (group 1 if time reduction gaming state, group 2 if non-time reduction gaming state, group G if limited frequency state -Loop 1), D202H: has separated 3 (time saving game state if Group 2, Group 2 for non-time reduction gaming state, group 1 if limited frequency state).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, at step 1401, the reserve / termination control means MJ 31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B to check whether or not there is a second main game symbol hold. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later in step 1400 (2), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600).

Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning sequence is the first main game symbol) The second main game symbol is configured to be prioritized and executed, but it is not limited to this. May be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this processing is substantially the same processing on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserve / termination control unit MJ 31 determines whether or not a change start condition is established. Here, the change start condition is not during special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not during main game symbol fluctuation, and there is a suspension of the main game symbol, and it is not during small hit game Is the condition. In addition, although not illustrated in this example, when the fluctuation fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display symbol after the final display of the main gaming symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation during the fluctuation fixed time May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the holding and digesting control means MJ31 is used as the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) While reading out the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the present symbol variation temporarily stored, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A (second main game The symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding and digesting processing). Next, in step 1408, the lottery means MN10 refers to the first main gaming coin lottery table MN11ta-A (the second main gaming coin lottery MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, the first main game Based on the game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the winning lottery random number), the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game use lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game use lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot probability in the non-probability variation gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, although the example in which the game state can not be shifted (so-called small hit) is illustrated, a small hit may not be generated (a small hit is won). Further, in the present embodiment, while there are a plurality of (first example, two types of “HA” and “HB”) lost symbols on the first main game side, there is a single missing symbol on the second main game side ( In this example, "HC") is configured to be present. The number of lost symbols on the side of the first main game (second main game) is merely an example, and there is no limitation to this (for example, the number of lost symbols on the first main game side is three or more). The first main game side lost symbol may be single and the second main game side lost symbol may be plural, or both of the first main game and the second main game side may be plural. ). Also, in this example, in the first main game side lost symbol, the ratio of “HA” is configured to be larger than the ratio of “HB”, but is not limited thereto (for example, “HB” The ratio may be configured to be larger than the “HA” ratio, or these may be equal ratios).

  Next, in step 1410, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) is the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (the second main game symbol determination) For the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming symbol equality lottery result and the first main gaming content determination random number (the second main gaming content determination random number) (especially, the symbol lottery random number) with reference to the lottery table MN41ta-B) for Are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "3A, 4A, 5A, 7A, 9A" and "3B, 4B, 5B, ... One of the main game symbols from 7B ′ ′) is configured to be determined as a big hit symbol. In addition, 3A, 3B and 4B are 2R short opening big hit (the opening time of big winning opening is compared with the long opening big hit of 3A, 3B and 4B) the number of rounds of special game and the opening time of big winning opening determined with reference to the main game design Big opening), 4A, 5A, 9A and 5B 4R long opening big hit (opening time of the big winning opening is a long hit compared to short opening big hit), 7A and 7B 16R long opening big hit (big hit opening opening time is a big hit that is long compared to short open big hit). The random number value and the type of stop symbol are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols on the first main game side ("HA" and "HB" 2 types) and 1 type (1 type of "HC") is provided on the 2nd main game side, but it is not limited to this, in both 1st main game side and 2nd main game side, A plurality of types of lost symbols may be provided, and any number of lost symbols on the first main game side and the second main game may be one type.

  Next, in step 1412, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) refers to the flag area of the limitation frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and the limitation frequency It is determined whether the A flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1450, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) performs limited frequency A variation mode determination processing described later, Control goes to step 1418. On the other hand, if No in step 1412, in step 1414, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) is a flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. To determine whether the limit frequency B flag is on. If Yes in step 1414, in step 1500, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) performs limited frequency B variation mode determination processing, which will be described later, Control goes to step 1418. If No in step 1414, in step 1416, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) is a first main game variation corresponding to each gaming state. With reference to the form determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on (in particular, the variation mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1418.

Here, the main gaming table 3 shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of a first main gaming variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-A (a second main gaming variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-B) In the figure, not only the main gaming table 3 but also the limited frequency table are shown simultaneously, which will be described later). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the main gaming symbol with respect to a random number can be determined based on the main gaming symbol short result status and the main gaming time short flag status of the main gaming symbol. It is done. For example, with regard to a random number value, when the main lottery is a winning or losing lottery result, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, when the main game time short flag is on (time reduction game In the state (1), a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined. Note that this example is just an example and is not limited at all to the type of the variation mode (variation time) or the selectivity. In addition, the symbol variation time of the first main game may be relatively long in the time shortening gaming state (when the main game short flag is on) {symbol variation on the second main game When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by lowering the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (as it is advantageous for the player) In order to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main game side can not be separated.

  In addition, as shown in this figure (in particular, FIG. 15), in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, the result of the lottery result is lost and the determined symbol (during the reserve digestion) When the symbol to be stopped is "HA", a variation mode that is a short time (in this example, variation time is 15 seconds or less) is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively low probability of big hit is selected Easy to configure). On the other hand, in the present example, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB” in the non-time shortening gaming state, the relative is more than the case where the determination symbol is “HA”. Of the fluctuation time which is a long time (in this example, fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more) is easy to be selected (that is, it is easy to be selected the production with a relatively high expectation of big hit), and The average value is configured to be relatively long. Moreover, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the case of the non-time shortening gaming state, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is more than “HA”. A predetermined variation mode (for example, a variation mode of 120 seconds) which is a long time is configured to be easily selected. It should be noted that a plurality of types of stop symbols for losing the second main game may be provided, and in such a case, the above-described configuration (configuration according to "HA" and "HB") is used as the second main You may apply to the stop symbol which concerns on the loss by the side of a game.

  Next, at step 1418, the game content determination means MN temporarily changes the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, attribute information of stop symbol) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM the information related to the determined main gaming symbol such as fluctuation mode information etc. and the command relating to the current gaming state etc. The processing is sent to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the predetermined time relating to the change time of the main game symbol to the first and second main game symbol change management timer MP11t-C. Do. Next, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display area A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). In accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C on the second main game symbol display portion B21g), the variable display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1428.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and changes. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1428, and in the case of No in step 1426, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the change time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C send information (design confirmation display instruction command) indicating that symbol variation is finished to the sub main control unit SM side The command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display area A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means M
The stop symbol stored in B11b-C is displayed and controlled as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1434, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1436, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1436, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C in step 1440, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is small. It is determined whether or not it is a hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1440, the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b in step 1442, and proceeds to step 1550. Also in the case of No at step 1440, the process proceeds to step 1550.

  Next, in step 1550, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600). Also in the case of No at step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 10 (in the present embodiment, as described above, the limited frequency A is the second main game start) It has become a limited frequency accompanied by the fact that it is in the state where it is easy to open mouth electric power item B11d). First, in step 1452, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c, and the counter value is the continuation possibility value (the second main game start opening motorized combination B11d is easily opened state = time reduction game It is a value related to the variation that may become the final variation of the variable. In this example, it is determined whether or not 41 and 1). In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determining lottery table MN 52 ta (limited frequency table A-1), and the main gaming side random number,
The variation mode (variation time) according to the main game symbol is determined based on the result of the success or failure lottery, and the process moves to step 1458. Here, the continuity permission value is a counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c at which the time reduction gaming state can end, and in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions that can be granted after the end of the special game is 20 times or 60 times. The counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c becomes the continuation possibility value before the start of the 20th and 60th fluctuations from the end of the special game.

  Here, the tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN 52 ta (in particular, the limited frequency table A-1). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, the limit frequency table is used when the limit frequency counter A flag is on and the limit frequency counter value is the continuation possibility value (in this example, 41 or 1). A-1 is referred to.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1456, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN 52 ta (limit frequency table A-2), and the main gaming side random number As a result, based on the stop symbol for the main game symbol,
The variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process moves to step 1458.

Here, the tables shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 17 are an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN 52 ta (in particular, the limited frequency table A-2). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, the limit frequency is set when the limit frequency counter A flag is on and the limit frequency counter value is other than the continuation possibility value (in this example, 41 or 1). Table A-2 is referred to.

  Next, in step 1458, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 subtracts 1 from the count value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c. Next, in step 1460, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c to determine whether the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1460, in step 1462, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 turns off the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b, and executes the next process (step 1418). Transition to processing). Also in the case of No at step 1460, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 1418).

Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 10 (as described above, the second main game start opening motorized part B11 d is a limited frequency B) Is a limited frequency with being difficult to open). First, in step 1502, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determining lottery table MN 52ta (limited frequency table B), and determines the main gaming side random number, the result of the winning lottery, the stop symbol related to the main gaming symbol. Based on it, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined. Next, in step 1504, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 subtracts 1 from the count value of the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2. Next, step 1
At 506, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 turns off the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b, and the next process (step 1418). Transition to processing). Also in the case of No in step 1506, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418).

  Here, the limited frequency table B shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN 52 ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limit frequency table B is referred to when the limit frequency B flag is on.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 17, the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode determination lottery table according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the variation mode random number division information is configured to be determined for a certain random number value (or random number value range). The variation mode random number division information is provided in each table of the first main game when it hits (when it loses) and the second main game when it hits (when it loses). More specifically, it is divided into two divisions of division 1 to division 2 at the time of the loss of the second main game side (the variation mode in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol can be the shortest time is the division 1 to the main game The variation mode in which the variation time of the symbol can be the longest is the division 2), and it is divided into three divisions at the time of hitting the first main game side and hitting the second main game side (of the main game pattern The variation mode in which the variation time can be the shortest is 1; the variation mode in which the variation time of the main gaming symbol is the longest is 3) and 1 to 4 during the loss on the first main game side Divided into up to four divisions (The fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol can be the shortest time is division 1, and the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol can be the longest time is the division 4) .

Also, whether the main game time short flag is on / off and the table to be referred to is a normal (non-limit frequency) variation mode determination table or a limit frequency table? {Limit frequency flag (limit frequency A flag or Random frequency value of fluctuation time and fluctuation mode group depending on ON / OFF of the restriction frequency B flag) (furthermore, regarding the restriction frequency A flag, whether the counter value of the restriction frequency counter A is a predetermined value or not) The range is configured to be different (for example, the range of the random number is different even in the same group 1), and by transmitting the variation mode random number division information to the sub side, the variation according to these gaming states The aspect group is configured to be able to be derived on the sub side. That is, when the gaming state transitions between the occurrence of the hold and the conclusion of the hold, the variation mode group scheduled at the occurrence of the hold may differ from the variation mode group executed at the conclusion of the hold. (For example, the fluctuation mode group was scheduled to become group 1 because the non-time shortening gaming state occurs at the time of occurrence of holding, but the actual fluctuation mode group becomes group 2 because the time shortening gaming state is reached at the conclusion of holding). As for fluctuation mode random number division information in which a common fluctuation mode group is assigned across all gaming states, the variation mode random number division information is received by the sub-side (following game states) It is possible to properly execute so-called pending pre-reading effect without considering the transition). Note that “common” in FIGS. 14 to 17 in this embodiment means that fluctuation time and fluctuation mode of table contents are common, but (1) fluctuation modes differ and fluctuation time value Are the same, (2) the effect mode to be executed is the same, (3) the same effect mode regardless of the gaming state (e.g. regardless of the gaming state such as the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state) Although the processing (allocation of variation pattern numbers, etc.) in the main control board M is different, the effect mode may be “common” to be substantially the same. Moreover, you may be comprised so that the candidate of the fluctuation | variation aspect which may be selected, and / or the number of candidates may differ by stop symbol (decision symbol). In addition, the fluctuation mode random number division information in Figure 14-Figure 17, depending on whether it is the fluctuation of the 1st main game side or the fluctuation of the 2nd main game side and whether the result of the lottery is a hit or a loss, Although it was constituted to form different fluctuation mode random number division information, it is not limited to this, whether it is fluctuation of the 1st main game side or 2nd main game side and whether it is a hit lottery result One variation mode random number delimiter information including a loss may be formed.

  Moreover, as shown to this figure, in this example, it is comprised so that fluctuation time may differ according to the number of pending | holding. For example, with regard to the first main gaming symbol variation in the non-time shortening gaming state, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is "HA", the variation mode determination table contents to be referred to according to the number of reservations on the first main game side (Change the contents of the variation mode determination table to be referred to in the case where the number of reservations is 0 to 1 and in the case where the number of reservations is 2 and 3). That is, when the determined symbol when the success or failure lottery result is a loss, if the design symbol is "HA", the fluctuation time (and the presentation mode) may differ depending on the number of reservations at the start of the fluctuation Is configured to be indeterminate}, but when the decision pattern in the case of the result of the success or failure lottery is “HB” is “HB”, the fluctuation time (and the presentation mode) regardless of the number of reservations at the time of reservation ) Is configured so that it can be determined. In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and the number of holdings used as the reference | standard which switches the fluctuation mode determination table content can be changed suitably (for example, it is set as 3 divisions of 0, 1-2-3 or 0) -It may be one, two, three four segments, etc.). In addition, it is configured that the fluctuation time may differ depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation, in both cases where the decision symbol is “HA” and “HB” when the success / failure lottery result is a loss. You may As a configuration example when configured as such, (1) the difference between the average value of fluctuation time when the number of reservations is 0-1 and the average value of fluctuation time when the number of reservations is 2-3 If the decision symbol is "HB" than if it is "HA", the configuration is smaller (2) If the decision symbol is "HB" than if it is "HA" The configuration may be such that the probability that the variation mode (variation time) is determined without dependency is high (the random number range is wide).

Here, in this example, regarding the symbol variation of the first main game side at the time of non-time shortening gaming state, when the result of the lottery is a loss and the determined symbol is “HA”, the number of reservations is 0 to 1 If the random number is "0 to 799", the group 1 is selected. If the random number is "800 to 1023", the group 2 is selected. If the number of reservations is 2 to 3, the random number is random. "0 ~
In the case of 899 ", it becomes group 1, and in the case of a random number value of" 900-1023 ", it becomes group 2. Therefore, if the random number value is "0 to 799", the variation mode group is determined to be group 1, and if the random number value is "900 to 1023", the variation mode group is determined to be group 2, but the random number value In the case of “800 to 899”, it is unclear whether the variation mode group becomes the group 1 or the group 2 until the end of the hold. In other words, when the determination symbol in the case of the success or failure lottery result being a loss is "HA", a random value (or random value range) in which the variation mode group can be uniquely determined (in this example, "0-0" There are random numbers (or random numbers from 799 "or" 900 to 1023 ") and random patterns (or random number ranges for which the variation mode group is hard to determine uniquely) (in this example, random numbers from" 800 to 899 "). In order to pre-read effects for which the decision symbol in the case of the failure lottery result is “HA” to perform the pre-reading effect for the hold, the change is actually belonging to which fluctuation mode group at the time of the hold process. It may be necessary to determine the number of reservations to determine the In addition, it is desirable to be configured to be able to execute the pre-reading lottery when the newly generated pending variation mode group is a random value (or a random value range) that can be uniquely determined. It is possible to execute an appropriate prefetch lottery (for example, when the random number value for a certain hold is “900 to 1023”, the number of remaining holds at the time of the digestion of the certain hold is any case) Even if it is configured to execute reach presentation in the variation mode group of "group 2" because it becomes "group 2", when the certain hold occurs, the decision regarding the certain hold is made Even if the symbol is scheduled to be "HA", it will be possible to execute the pre-hold effect on hold = it is known that reach effect will eventually occur. Only does not occur inconsistency be executed pending read-ahead performance of).

  In this example, the fluctuation time included in each group is the fluctuation time in the same range (for example, at the time of losing, the fluctuation time is 15 seconds or less in the group 1 regardless of whether or not it is a time shortening gaming state). (Including, but not limited to, variations in the time), and the variation time that can be selected is completely different (for example, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the variation time of 10 to 120 seconds is selected, the time In the reduced gaming state, when 1 to 5 seconds and 10 seconds of fluctuation time is selected), a certain gaming state is not divided into fluctuation mode groups by an absolute fluctuation time independent of the gaming state. Divide the fluctuation group by the relative fluctuation time in (for example, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the fluctuation time is 10 to 15 seconds fluctuation in the group 1, the time shortening gaming state Time Group 1 variation of 1.5 seconds, and isolate) as may be configured. Moreover, it is not limited to dividing a group according to fluctuation time, for example, group information (for example, one of a plurality of reach effects in which character A appears is executed, for example, group information divided based on the execution content of the effect) Range information obtained by dividing the fluctuation to perform any of the reach effects of the group A and the plurality of reach effects in which the character B appears as the group B, that is, the jackpot when the reach effect is performed The expectation and the linked information may be transmitted to the sub side.

According to the configuration of the present example, in the case where the gaming state can be different between the timing when the certain hold occurs and the timing when the certain hold is digested in the certain reserve to be the target of the prefetch effect (for example, the certain hold) It is possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading effect in consideration of a transition of the gaming state such as when the reserve to be digested earlier is a big hit etc.). More specifically, when a non-probability fluctuation gaming state is reached at the timing of a certain holding with respect to a certain holding occurring at the time of probability fluctuation gaming state, the fluctuation mode group included in the fluctuation mode random number division information regarding the certain holding All belong to a group with a high expectation value (even if the gaming state changes, the expected degree of suspension can be maintained), or the same variation mode in the probability variation gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state In the case of being a group, it is possible to execute prefetching effects relating to a certain hold, and a group having a low expectation value when referring to the non-probable fluctuation gaming state as a change mode group included in the fluctuation mode random number division information relating to the certain hold Changes in the game status may decrease the expected degree of suspension, or the probability fluctuation gaming state and non-probability If the different fluctuation mode group and a rate change gaming state, and infeasible prefetching effect related to the certain pending, it can be an equal.

  Also, as an example in which the gaming state transitions in this way, and the scheduled variation mode group and the variation mode group to be actually executed may differ, (1) there are a plurality of holds in the main game hold In the current situation, a certain hold in the main game hold is digested and becomes a big hit (or small hit), and after the end of the special game related to the certain hold (or after the end of the bonus game for the small hit), the gaming state transitions ( For example, the transition from the non-probability fluctuation gaming state to the probability fluctuation gaming state), and the example of the variation mode group of the suspension within the main gaming suspension which remains at the time of the certain suspension may be different, (2) special game end The game state is transitioned after the main gaming symbol has been changed a predetermined number of times from the end (or after the small hit end) (for example, the time shortening gaming state after the special game end, the main game symbol 50 times after the special game end It is configured to be able to transition to a non-time shortening gaming state etc.) at the moved timing, etc., and the hold that occurs before the predetermined number of changes of the main game symbol end after the special game end (or after the small hit end), An example in which the variation mode group may be different when the special game is digested after the predetermined number of times of variation of the main gaming symbol is over after the special game is ended, (3) the main gaming symbol of when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state It is configured to execute a lottery (so-called fall lottery) to shift to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state for each fluctuation, and trigger hold occurs in the probability fluctuation play state, and by winning the fall lottery before the trigger hold is digested An example etc. in which a variation mode group may differ are mentioned.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the same variation mode group (for example, group 1 when the main game time short flag is on and the group when the main game time short flag is off) by turning on / off the main game time short flag Even in the case of 1), the range of random numbers included in the same variation mode group is configured to be different, and variation mode random number delimiter information consisting only of the range of the different random numbers (for example, the second main There are a plurality of divisions 1) at the time of hitting the lottery table for determining the game variation mode. In addition, variation mode random number division information (for example, the second main) consisting of only a range of random numbers included in the case of both main game time short flag being on and off within the range of random numbers possessed by the same variation mode group There is also a break 3) at the time of hitting the lottery table for determining the game variation mode. The number of types of variation mode random number division information in each table (for example, four of the division 1 to the division 4 at the time of losing of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table) is the number of types of variation mode groups (For example, it is configured to be more than three in group 1 to group 3 at the time of losing of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table).

Further, in the present embodiment, the group 3 (group C) of the variation mode groups may be selected as the variation mode group only when it is scheduled to have a variation time (60 seconds or more in this example) for a predetermined time or more. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the group 3 (group C) in the variation mode group is selected, the variation time is relatively long {in other words, the expectation of becoming a big hit is high (the variation mode which can be selected) The percentage of the domestic jackpot will increase)). In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, group 3 may be configured to be more easily selected (with a wider range of random numbers) in the non-time shortening gaming state than in the time shortening gaming state {time shortening During the gaming state (especially in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), by configuring the fluctuation that makes the fluctuation time to be short is easy to be selected, the time required to the next big hit is shortened, It can reduce stress. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, the second main game start opening electric role B11d is easy to be opened, it is easy to enter the second main game start opening B10, it is difficult to occur a situation where there is no hold} . In addition, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be easily selected when the group 3 is in the time shortening gaming state than in the non-time shortening gaming state {during time shortening gaming (especially, probability fluctuation gaming state and time Since the reduced gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than during the non-time reduced gaming state, it is effective to use the effect with a high degree of expectation to get the player's sense of expectation}. In addition, the policy on grouping of variation mode groups may be changed as appropriate, and the number of groups and the number and type of variation modes (variation time) belonging to each group are limited to the above examples. Absent. For example, in the present example, those belonging to group 3 (group C) are “those that are scheduled to have a fluctuation time longer than a predetermined time”, but in addition to this, “the fluctuation time that is the longest time that can be selected” It is also possible to assume that it is scheduled to become or "the average value of the variation modes (variation time) belonging to the group is a predetermined time or more", or "the jackpot is determined". In addition, the fluctuation mode is correlated with the presentation modes (for example, lost presentation, normal reach presentation, super reach presentation 1, super reach presentation 2, big hit confirmed super reach presentation, etc.) executed by the sub main control unit SM. You may comprise so that a group may be divided (a loss production corresponding | compatible fluctuation | variation mode group, a normal reach production corresponding | compatible fluctuation | variation group group, ..., a big hit decision super reach production | presentation fluctuation | variation group).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the random time possessed by the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode group depends on whether the main game time short flag is ON / OFF and whether the table to be referred to is a normal fluctuation mode determination table or a limited frequency table Range is different, but depending on whether the gaming state is non-probability fluctuation gaming state or probability fluctuation gaming state, the fluctuation time and / or the range of random numbers possessed by the fluctuation mode group differ depending on etc. It may be configured to obtain.

  Also, in this example, in the second main game variation mode determination table, in the non-probability variation state and the non-time shortening gaming state, a specific variation mode that can be selected only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol. (In the present example, it is configured to have a fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is 40 seconds). With such a configuration, when a specific effect is selected, it may be recognized by the player that the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol, so whether the specific effect is executed or not It is possible to add variety to the presentation and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, this example is only an example to the last, for example, in the non-probability fluctuation state and the non-time shortening gaming state, while the reach effect can be selected only when the second main gaming symbol is a big hit symbol, If the symbol is a lost symbol, only non-reach effects may be performed. In addition, in another gaming state (probability fluctuation state and non-time shortening gaming state or limited frequency state), a specific reach effect (or reach effect) is similarly performed only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol. It may be configured to be selectable.

  Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variation mode of the first main game side, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the determined symbol is "HA", it is referred to in the non-time shortening gaming state. Contents of the table of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table and the limited frequency table B which is referred to when the limited frequency B flag is on (in the present example, for example, when a small hit is won) (For example, the fluctuation time corresponding to the random value and the fluctuation mode group) are the same. That is, in this embodiment, on the first main game side, even if the variation pattern table is changed, if it is in the non-time shortening gaming state, it is a lost symbol (in this example, it is “HA” but The contents of the table related to the same table configuration as for “HB” (variation time corresponding to random value, variation mode group, whether variation mode depends on number of reservations, etc.) can be identical It is configured. Note that this example is merely an example, and the contents of the table relating to the lost symbol may be changed (or made identical) depending on whether or not it is the probability variation gaming state, or the second main game side A similar configuration may be provided in the variation mode.

Also, in this example, even if the success / failure lottery result is a loss and the determination symbol is the same (“HA” or “HB”), different variation modes can be selected according to the gaming state. ing. For example, in the case of the first main game side variation mode determination table, in the case of a non-time shortening gaming state regarding the case where the success or failure lottery result is a loss and the determination symbol is "HB", the variation time is 30 seconds While only the effect that becomes the above is configured to be selected, when it is in the time shortening gaming state, the effect that the fluctuation time is 5 seconds may be selected (specifically, the non-time shortening gaming state In such a case, an effect with a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than in the case of the time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, in the case of the time reduction game state in the first main game side fluctuation mode determination table in which the success or failure lottery result is a loss and the determination symbol is "HA", it is a non-time reduction game state The variation mode, which is a variation with a short variation time (five seconds in this example), is configured to be relatively easy to be selected. In addition, this example is an example, and even when the gaming state is different, when the determined symbol is the same, the same variation mode (more specifically, for example, variation time) is configured to be selected. May be In the present embodiment, when the determined symbol is "HA", the variation mode (variation time) may differ depending on the number of reservations when the non-time shortening gaming state is in effect {variation mode (variation time) May depend on the number of reservations}. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, the variation number (variation time) is not different depending on the number of reservations. Further, when the determined symbol is "HB", the variation mode (variation time) is not different depending on the number of reservations regardless of the gaming state.

  In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and in the case where the success or failure lottery result is a loss and the determined symbol is "HB", the case of probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state and the non probability fluctuation gaming state and non If it is in the time reduction gaming state, the selection ratio of the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time becomes a long time (in this example, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) may be different {more specifically, the probability fluctuation game In the case of the state and the non-time shortening gaming state, even if it is configured to increase or decrease the selection ratio of the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long (in this example, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more). Good. Similarly, in the case where the success or failure lottery result is a loss and the determined symbol is "HA", the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state In addition, it is possible to change the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is short (in this example, the variation time is 20 seconds or more) {More specifically, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state In this case, it may be configured to increase or decrease the selection ratio of the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively short (in this example, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds or more)}.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the success or failure lottery result is a loss, the determination symbol is "HA" and the non-time shortening gaming state is, the variation time in the variation mode on the first main game side Are configured to have groups that can differ depending on the number of reservations at the start of the change. Similarly, even if the determination symbol is "HA", in the variation mode of the first main game side in the case of the time shortening gaming state, the variation time (and the presentation mode regardless of the number of reservations at the time of reservation termination) ) Is configured so that it can be determined. In addition, this example is only an example to the end, and, for example, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a loss and the determined symbol is “HA” (“HB”), whether or not the gaming state (probability fluctuation state or Or regardless of whether or not it is a time saving gaming state), the fluctuation time (and effect mode) may differ depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation {or in the non-time shortening gaming state, the determination of the first main gaming side When the symbol is "HB", it may be configured so that it can be determined in one fluctuation time (and presentation mode) regardless of the number of reservations at the time of reservation.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, in the case of a suspension where the stop symbol is scheduled to be “HA”, the selection tendency of the variation mode may differ depending on the number of reservations at the time of the digestion of the suspension relating to the “HA” It is comprised and it is comprised by the fluctuation mode random-number delimitation information so that there may be a case where it does not differ from the case where a fluctuation mode group differs, by the number of reservations at the time of the digestion of the reservation concerning the said HA. In addition, in the case of a suspension where the stop symbol is scheduled to be "HB", the selection tendency of the variation mode is configured so as not to be different depending on the number of reservations at the time of digestion of the suspension related to the "HB". I will supplement it.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1570, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction number counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is larger than 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1570, the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the count value of the time saving number counter MP52c in step 1572 (decrement). Next, in step 1574, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction number counter MP52c to determine whether the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is zero. If YES in step 1574, in step 1576 and step 1578, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, Processing (processing of step 1600). Also in the case of No in step 1552, step 1570 or step 1574, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination unit MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b to determine whether the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 is in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB30b, a specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time short flag, auxiliary game time short Turn off the flag). Next, at step 1606, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c to zero. Next, at step 1608, the specified game control means MP50 clears the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c and the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2. Next, in step 1610, the specified game control means MP50 turns off the limit frequency A flag and the limit frequency B flag in the flag area of the limit frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b. Next, in step 1612, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1614, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1700). Also in the case of No in step 1602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704 and step 1706, the special game execution means MP33 turns the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and turns off the special game execution flag Turn on. Next, in step 1707, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1708, the special game execution means MP33 sets a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game to the sub main control unit ( In the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side is transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712. In addition, in the case of No in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33,
It is determined that the special game permission has not been issued, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, in step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 opens the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to the open pattern (for example, the main game symbol is stopped) If the symbol is 3A, 3B or 4B, the opening pattern "0.2 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed", the stop symbol of the main game symbol is 4A, 5A, 7A, 9A, In the case of 5B or 7B, an open pattern of “29.0 seconds open → close” is set. Next, in step 1716, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1720, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first big winning opening electric combination C11d (or the second large winning opening electric combination C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to make a first large winning combination. The mouth C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) is set to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer), and the process is shifted to step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processing of steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 transmits the game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM side. The command transmission buffer MT10 for the command is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) in the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball of). In the case of Yes in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer) in step 1726 for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) related to opening the special winning opening. It is determined whether it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process proceeds to step 1728. In the case of No at step 1726, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

Next, in step 1728, the special game execution means MP33 is the first large winning opening electric combination C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric combination C21d of the second large winning opening C20) The driving is stopped and the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1733, special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and whether or not the final round is over (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b It is determined whether the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1738, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect of ending the special game to the sub main control unit SM side. (The control command transmission processing in step 1999 is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Then, in step 1750, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800). Also in the case of No at step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability change big hit symbol (probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of special game execution) It is a jackpot symbol to shift, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 3A, 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the specified game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to step 1756. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, ie, the stop symbol is a big hit symbol which does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the termination of the special game, the step also in the case of 4A · 4B). Migrate to 1756.

  Next, in step 1756, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability change / time / short / big hit symbol (probability fluctuation after the end of the special game execution) It is a jackpot symbol to shift to the gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is the awakening stage probability variation, hour and day large hit symbol (this example Then, it is determined whether or not 5A · 3B). It should be noted that the awakening stage probability variation / time junior high hit pattern is an awakening stage (a staying stage, which can inform the player at the time of the end of the stage whether or not it is a probability fluctuation gaming state) after the big hit ends. It is a big hit design to shift to. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the specified game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter AMN 52 a predetermined number of times (60 times in this example). Next, in step 1762, the specific game control means MP 50 turns on the limit frequency A flag in the flag area of the limit frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52 b. Next, in step 1764, the specific game control means MP50 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM an awakening stage shift command (a command relating to information to the effect of transitioning to the awakening stage). (Sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1778. Also in the case of No at step 1758, the process proceeds to step 1778.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1756 (that is, in the present example, when the stop symbol is any of 3A, 4A and 4B), in step 1766, the specified game control means MP50 is the first and second main game symbols The stop symbol refers to the information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a big hit symbol that shifts to a non probability changing gaming state and a time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game execution. • Determine if it is 4B). In the case of Yes in step 1766, in step 1768, the specific game control means MP50 sets the count value of the time reduction counter MP52c to the number of time reductions based on the big hit symbol (the time delay may differ depending on the type of big hit symbol) For example, when the stop symbol 4A is further subdivided into 4A-1 and 4B-1, the case of 4A-1 or 4B-1 is 20 times, and the case of 4A-2 or 4B-2 The number of times is 60 times, etc.) Thus, in this example, 4A-1 (4B-1) whose time reduction number is 20 times and 4A-2 whose time reduction number is 60 times in the big hit design belonging to 4A design (4B design) 4A-2), and the type of jackpot symbol and the type of time-savings are not limited thereto, and other time-savings (for example, time-savings of 40 times) 4A- 3 (4B-3) may be further provided, and 4A-1 and 4A-2 (4B-1 and 4B-2) in the illustrated number of times in the respective big hit symbols or in the 4A symbol (4B symbol) The ratio of) can be changed as appropriate. Next, in step 1770, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c to the same value (20 times or 60 times) as the time reduction number set in the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1772, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limit frequency A flag in the flag area of the limit frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1774, the specified game control means MP50 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the awakening stage transition command and the command related to the count value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c to the sub main control unit SM (step It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1778. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1766 {ie, in the case where the stop symbol is the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example)}, in step 1776, the specified game control means MP50 is the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b. With reference to the flag area, it is determined whether or not at least one of the main game probability change flag and the main game time short flag is on at the time of the big hit. If Yes in step 1776, the process proceeds to step 1778.

  Next, in steps 1778 and 1780, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next process (step Move to process 1800).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1776 {ie, when the main game probability change flag and the main game time short flag are off (normal game state)}, at step 1782, the specified game control means MP50 is a demon stage shift command (devil stage Command in the command transmission buffer for sending to the sub main control unit SM (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command sending processing of step 1999) , Shift to the next processing (processing of step 1800). It should be noted that after the end of the special game according to the "3A" symbol won in the normal gaming state, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, and after the small hitting game ended in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state It remains as it is, and it is comprised so that the substantially same presentation may be performed in any case. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the special game (small hit game) pertaining to either the "3 A" symbol or the small hit symbol is executed (so-called creation of a latent state), and the fun of the game is It will be improved.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of small hit game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. First, at step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b and determines whether the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b in step 1804. Next, in step 1806, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b in the opening pattern (in this example, the first big prize similar to the time of execution of the special game according to the latent probability change big hit symbol The opening and closing pattern of the mouth C10 is set, for example, 0.2 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed). Next, in step 1808, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1810, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the first large winning opening C10 and starts the small hit game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1811, the small hit game control means MP40 is a special game start display instruction command (a command to the sub side, and in this example, the effect mode during the small hit game relates to the latent probability change big hit symbol special Since it is the same as the effect mode in the game, it is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side the same command as in the case of the latent probability variation big hit symbol (step) The control command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission processing of 1999, and the process proceeds to step 1812. In the present embodiment, when the small hit or latent probability change big hit is won in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (normal gaming state), the opening of the first large winning opening C10 in the small hitting game The mode and the effect mode are the same as in the special game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, and the stay stage to be executed after the end of the special game according to the latent probability variation big hit symbol after the small hit game is also the same. It becomes difficult for the player to determine which special game (or small hit game) pertaining to which big hit symbol with the hit symbol and the latent probability variation big hit symbol has been executed (it creates a so-called latent state), improving the interest of the game It will be

  On the other hand, if No in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40 b in step 1811 and determines whether the small hit execution flag is on or not. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1811, the process moves to step 1812.

  Next, in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the first large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s and determines whether or not there is a winning (entering) in the first large winning opening C10. If Yes in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40 b in step 1814, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are held in the first big winning opening C10. It is determined whether there was a In the case of Yes at step 1814, the process goes to step 1818. On the other hand, if No in step 1812 or step 1814, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game timer MP41t in step 1816 for a predetermined time (for example, 0 in this example) related to opening of the big winning opening. .2 It is determined whether or not 2 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 1.4 seconds involved in closing). If Yes in step 1816, then the process moves to step 1818.

  Next, in step 1818, the small hit game control means MP40 stops driving the first large winning opening electric combination C11d, and closes the first large winning opening C10. Next, in step 1820, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, at step 1823, the small hit game control means MP40 is a command to the special game end display instruction command (a command to the sub side, and in this example, the effect mode during the small hit game is a special according to the latent probability change big hit symbol Since it is the same as the effect mode in the game, it is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side the same command as in the case of the latent probability variation big hit symbol (step) In the control command transmission processing of 1999, the sub main control unit SM side is transmitted), and the process shifts to step 1824.

Next, in step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game probability change flag and the main game time short flag are off (normal game state) or not. Determine if If Yes in step 1824, the small hitting game control means MP40 turns on the limit frequency B flag in the flag area of the limit frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b in step 1826. Next, at step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the stopped main game symbol is the short hit small hit pattern {in this example, 1K, It is determined whether or not the number of times of fluctuation at which the limited frequency table is referred to after the small hitting game ends is smaller than the long number of small hitting symbols (2K). In the case of Yes in step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 performs the short number of times for the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 in step 1830 (
Set 10 times), and shift to step 1834. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the number of long times (30 times) to the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 at step 1832, and shifts to step 1834. Next, step 1
At 834, the small hit gaming control means MP40 sends a command for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM the command (command to the sub side) related to the demon stage transition command and the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2. The credit buffer MT10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (1997 process of step). Also in the case of No at step 1811, step 1816 or step 1824, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997). In the present embodiment, the large winning opening to be opened during the small hitting game is the first large winning opening C10, but it is not limited to this, the large winning opening to be opened during the small hitting game is 2 big winning opening C20 may also be, if configured as such, the special winning opening opened during the execution of the special game pertaining to the latent probability variation big hit symbol (in this example, 3A) is also the second large winning opening C20 Is preferred.

Next, control processing executed on the side of the sub main control unit SM will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 23 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 5D is a process on the side of the sub main control unit SM which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information When received → Initialize the sub-side RAM, when various information commands are received → Resetting related information at power-off to the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003, the sub main control unit SM indicates that the trigger is on hold (the on-off winning prize lottery) from the information on the on hold temporarily stored in the drawing on hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information (If there is no hold in the hold with the information that the trigger is hold, this process is not executed and it shifts to the next process), and all the display modes are "white" Display (Reset the processing related to the pre-reading effect). The processing at the time of power interruption is not limited to this, and even after return of power interruption, it is possible to continue the pre-reading effect without deleting the information indicating that the trigger is on hold or the information related to the on hold display mode. You may In such a configuration, for example, a save area where information can be maintained even during power failure is provided on the sub side, and information related to effects is backed up to the save area when a power failure occurs, and power failure recovery It may be configured to restore the information backed up from time to time. In addition, it is configured to receive information related to the content of the hold from the main side again at the time of power failure recovery, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of fluctuation stop, and at the time of hold occurrence (also regarding hold other than the hold newly generated). Although it is preferable {not shown in this example, the main side transmits only the information related to the number of reservations (the information related to the content of the suspension is not transmitted) at the time of power failure recovery. . Therefore, the information related to the hold existing at the time of the power interruption does not exist after the restoration of the power interruption, so that the pre-reading effect can not be executed for the holding (note that the main side holds the hold Information to be received, and may be configured to be able to execute pre-reading effect for the hold). It should be noted that if a power failure occurs while the decorative symbol is fluctuating, if it does not have the function to maintain the information at the time of the power failure, it will turn dark until the end command of the fluctuation is received from the main side. A screen (for example, a screen displaying "under preparation" etc.) will be displayed}. Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing that repeatedly executes (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM first performs a hold information management process described later in step 2100 as shown in the process of FIG. Run. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decoration symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes special game related display control processing described later. Next, in step 2600, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a stay stage determination process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes display command transmission control processing (sends the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), End the repeat processing routine.

  As described above, the sub main control unit SM employs a mode in which the sub main routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 6C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example , NMI terminal) is the processing flow (c) when it is connected. That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM receives a command input port from the main control board M side ( Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above. Then, at step 2006, based on the check result, the sub main control unit SM sends a command sent from the main control board M to the RAM on the sub main control unit SM side (for example, main side information temporary storage means SM11 b). Are temporarily stored, and the process returns to the process that was being performed immediately before this interrupt process.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a command relating to the new hold generation from the main control board M side (first main game symbol or second main It is determined whether or not hold information pertaining to the game symbol has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, A maximum of four for the second main game is added "1". Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 temporarily sends a command concerning the new hold success / failure result and stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b. Remember. Next, in step 2108, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 generates hold information (in particular, fluctuation mode group, fluctuation mode random number division information, etc.) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , Temporarily storing in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. In the case where the information concerning the stop result, the variation pattern group and the variation pattern random number division information is not transmitted from the main side, the information is stored in the temporary storage information temporary storage area in step 2106 or step 2108. Will not be stored temporarily. Next, in step 2110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether the new hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2150, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning time prefetching determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2112. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2110, the coating material suspension information display control means SM22 executes, at step 2200, prefetching determination processing at the time of second main game winning, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2112.

  Next, at step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM 22 b and determines whether the information indicates that the new hold is a trigger hold. Do. If Yes in step 2112, in step 2250, the drawing hold information display control unit SM 22 executes prefetch holding content determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 2122. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2112, the processing shifts to step 2122.

On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2114, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2114, in step 2116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2118, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 holds information relating to the symbol change (in particular, the result of the pass / fail, stop symbol information, the fluctuation mode group and the fluctuation mode random number division information) The temporary storage means SM22b is deleted and the remaining reserve information is shifted. Next, in step 2120, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21 b, and proceeds to step 2122. Also in the case of No at step 2114, the process proceeds to step 2122.

  Next, in step 2122, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 controls the effect display device SG in the holding display mode determined by making full use of the effect display means SS (in particular, the first holding display unit SG12, the second holding On the display section SG13), the suspension display lamps of the same number as the clothing suspension counter value in the clothing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prediction process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. The present processing is divided into two, processing pertaining to the prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery and processing pertaining to the pre-drawing lottery. In the prohibition process of the former prefetch lottery, first, in step 2152, the reserve prefetch effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main game hold (the first main game hold) It is determined whether or not there is a hold) which is prioritized prior to the game player. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM 26k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11 b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2158, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b and there is a pending with information indicating that the trigger is pending within pending. It is determined whether there is any. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the prize pre-selection lottery (the first main game prize pre-selection lottery, the second main game pre-selection lottery). In the case of Yes in step 2158, in step 2160, the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22 b, and whether or not there is a pending big hit in the pending before the new pending Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2160, the process moves to step 2162.

Next, in the processing relating to the latter pre-reading lottery, first, in step 2162, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b and the new pending becomes a big hit pending It is determined whether the In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a prize-prediction lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) with respect to the new reserve. It transfers to step 2174. On the other hand, if No in step 2162, in step 2166 the reserve pre-reading effect executability decision means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22 b, and does the stop symbol relating to the new reserve be "HA"? It is determined whether or not. If the result of step 2166 is YES, then, in step 2168, pending pre-reading effect executability determination means SM26k refers to drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b and determines whether the new pending change mode group is group 3 or not. judge. As described above, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading lottery, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading lottery in consideration of the variation mode group. In addition, when determining whether or not execution of the prefetch lottery is performed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the execution of the prefetch lottery is performed in consideration of the variation mode random number delimiter information. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a prize-prediction lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example) with respect to the new reserve It transfers to step 2174. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2166 (ie, when the stop symbol pertaining to the new hold is "HB"), at step 2172 the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k is predetermined for the new hold. probability(
In this example, a prize pre-selection lottery to be won in 1/3) is executed, and the process shifts to step 2174. As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the stop symbol relating to the first main game is "HB" is configured to be easier to win the prefetch lottery than when the stop symbol relating to the first main game is "HA".

  Next, at step 2174, the reserve prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM 26k determines whether or not the winning at time lottery bonus lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2174, in step 2176, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k is “trigger pending” in the new pending winning in the prize pre-reading lottery in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b. Information to the effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2152 (when the second main game hold exists in hold), at step 2178 the hold prefetching effect executability judging means SM26k temporarily displays in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information to the effect that it is "trigger pending" from the information related to the stored pending (If there is no pending with the information that the trigger is pending, this process is not executed, and the next process is not performed. To the next processing (processing of step 2112). Also in the case of No at Step 2154, Step 2158, Step 2160, or Step 2174, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of Step 2112). In the process of step 2178, when a hold on the second main game side exists (is generated), in the gaming machine of the second main game side preferential digest like the present embodiment, the newly generated second main game side In order to settle the game side's suspension first, it is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the scheduled change order is not made and the preread effect over plural changes is not executed normally. In addition, as a prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery, a condition as to whether or not there is a suspension of a specific variation mode group (or a suspension of specific variation mode random number delimiter information) in the suspension before the new suspension as a suspension condition It is also good.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the second main game winning combination prefetching determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. The present processing is divided into two, processing pertaining to the prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery and processing pertaining to the pre-drawing lottery. In the prohibition process of the former pre-reading lottery, first, at step 2202, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b and the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or not Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a pending with information indicating that the trigger is on pending in pending. It is determined whether there is any. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, pending pre-reading effect executability determination means SM26k refers to drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b, and there is no pending which is a big hit in pending before the new pending. Determine if If Yes in step 2206, then the process moves to step 2208.

  Next, in the process relating to the latter pre-reading lottery, at first, in step 2208, the pre-pending rendering effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b and the new pending becomes a big hit pending It is determined whether the In the case of Yes in step 2208, in step 2210, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a prize-prediction lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) with respect to the new reserve Transfer to step 2220. On the other hand, if the result of step 2208 is No, in step 2212 the reserve prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether the new mode of change variation group is group C or not. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2216, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a prize-reading advance lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example) for the new reserve. Transfer to step 2220. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2212, the process proceeds to step 2220.

  Next, at step 2220, the pre-holding effect executability judging means SM 26k judges whether or not the winning pre-selection lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2222, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k is “trigger pending” in the new hold winning the prize pre-reading lottery in the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22 b. Information to the effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112). Also in the case of No in step 2202, step 2204, step 2206 or step 2220, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2112).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the prefetch holding content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, at step 2252, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2252, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of trigger hold in step 2254 with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and the next process (step 2122). Move to On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2252, the display mode of trigger suspension is determined at step 2256 with reference to the suspension display mode determination table (at the time of losing), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2122).

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) and the hold display mode decision table (at the time of losing). In the present embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected is iridescent, red when determining the display mode of trigger hold that can change when holding change effect execution is performed with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) There are four types of display modes, red, green and blue, and three types of display modes that can be selected when determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (when lost) are red, green and blue, and the hold display mode It is drawn by random number for exclusive use at the time of decision. In addition, when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the big hit), red is most easily selected, while at the time of referring to the hold display mode decision table (at the time of losing), blue is most easily selected. Big hit expectation degree for each display mode of pending when occurrence of i is selected when iridescent is big hit only, as colors except iridescent, it becomes red, green and blue in order of high expectation There is. In addition, the display mode which can be changed is an example to the last, and even if it increases and decreases a kind, even if it changes the color which can change, there is no problem at all. Moreover, in this example, although it was comprised so that the degree of expectation which will be a big hit could be suggested by the display color of pending | holding, it is not limited to this, For example, ) May be configured to indicate the game state after the special game is performed. When configured as such, in particular, during the probability variation gaming state, by the display color of the suspension, suggesting the degree of expectation to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is executed in the case of a big hit in the suspension (For example, if the reserve display color is red, the probability change expectation degree is high, if it is blue, the probability change expectation degree is low, etc.), the probability fluctuation game state advantageous to the player continues or ends It is possible to carry out an effective rendition.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the time of execution of the hold change presentation, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the display mode selected from the plurality of display modes of the hold. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a plurality of hold change effects during execution of the pre-reading effect (from the timing when the pre-reading lottery is won to the end of fluctuation of the main game symbol related to trigger hold). When configured in this manner, for example, when the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the pre-read effect, if the display mode of the hold that changes in the first hold change effect is blue, the second time Make the display mode of the change of the hold change effect into green or red, that is, change (rank up) to the display mode of the high hit expectation of the big hit every time the hold change effect is executed It is desirable to configure it so as to keep the player's expectation. In addition, the effect relating to the pending display change is not limited to this, and as a result, a presentation mode without accompanying the pending display change may be provided. For example, the pending may shake at the start of fluctuation (or upon pending withdrawal). An effect may be provided, and an effect aspect (so-called, cassette pattern) in which the hold display does not change as it is may be provided, and an effect mode in which the hold display change is subsequently executed.

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If the result of step 2302 is YES, in step 2304, the figure display content determination means SM21 n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21 b. Next, in step 2306, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) is the symbol information (temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). With reference to the stop symbol / variation mode pertaining to the main game symbol and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {eg, when the stop symbol pertaining to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol "Zorro eyes such as" 7 · 7 · 7 ", lost pattern, if the" 1 · · · 5 etc barak eyes "and fluctuation mode {eg, the fluctuation mode according to the main game pattern is a short time If it is fluctuation, it is non-reach, if it is fluctuation for a long time, normal reach or super reach etc.} is decided, drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related Distribution temporary storage unit SM24b, temporarily stored in the reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b). Next, in step 2308, the figure display content determination means SM21 n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21 b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). Transition. Also in the case of No in step 2302, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, at step 2402, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2402, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b in step 2404. Next, in step 2406, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on a symbol variation flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2408, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the dressing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. Also in the case of No at step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether the symbol change flag is on or not. In the case of Yes in step 2410, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the dressing variation time management timer SM 21t in step 2412. Next, in step 2414, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the dressing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the dressing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has reached. In the case of Yes in step 2414, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the decorative symbol in step 2416 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2999). , And move on to step 2426.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2414, at step 2418, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is a decoration based on the dressing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 2418, then step 2
At 420, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2418, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) at step 2422 is a drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM 25 b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2422, in step 2424, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). , Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and proceeds to step 2426. Also in the case of No at step 2422, the process proceeds to step 2426.

Next, in step 2426, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main gaming symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side) It is determined whether or not the information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 2426, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b in step 2428, and the awakening stage flag (a flag turned on during stay awakening stage described later It is determined whether or not there is an on state at step 2614). In the case of Yes in step 2428, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the awake stage stay counter SM23c in step 2430, and proceeds to step 2432. Also in the case of No at step 2428, the process proceeds to step 2432. Next, in step 2432, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and is a demon stage flag (a flag which is turned on while staying in the demon stage described later. It is determined whether or not it is turned on). In the case of Yes in step 2432, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the demon stage stay counter SM 23c-2 in step 2434 (step 243).
Migrate to 6. Also in the case of No at step 2432, the process proceeds to step 2436.

  Next, in step 2436, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). . Next, in step 2438, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the dressing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2500) Do. Also in the case of No in step 2410 or step 2426, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, at step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether the special game in progress flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If YES in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b in step 2506 and step 2508, and the effect display device A big hit start display is performed on the SG (a display is appropriately made based on the type of big hit), and the process moves to step 2512. Also in the case of No at step 2502, the process proceeds to step 2512.

  Next, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM 23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of wins on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gaming or big hit It may be performed as needed based on the type etc.).

  Next, in step 2514, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying an effect relating to a special game in progress based on the gaming state at the time of winning the corresponding big jack in execution and the jackpot symbol in suspension ( Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) (for example, in the case of a special game or small hit game according to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, the game state after the end of the special game is played Effects that can not be recognized by the person may be performed). Next, at step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2600). . Also in the case of No in step 2504 or step 2516, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, at step 2602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the awakening stage flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the background effect display control unit SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage unit SM11b and determines whether or not an awake stage transition command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets a "wake-up stage" as a stay stage. Next, in step 2608, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c has been received from the main side. If YES in step 2608, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets the counter value of the received limited frequency counter AMN 52c in the wakefulness stage stay counter SM23c in step 2610, and proceeds to step 2614. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2608, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the wakefulness stage staying counter SM 23c at the predetermined number of times (60 times in this example) at step 2612 and moves to step 2614. In addition, when executing the processing of step 2612, it is supplemented that the main-side gaming state is the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state.

Next, in step 2614, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the awake stage flag, and proceeds to step 2616. Also in the case of No at step 2602, the process proceeds to step 2616. Next, in step 2616, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the awake stage stay counter SM23c and determines whether the counter value is zero or not. The counter value of the awakening stage staying counter SM23c is configured to be decremented by one for each change (every stop of the main game symbol). If Yes in step 2616, then the process moves to step 2618. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2616, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game is won at step 2619 with reference to the main information temporary storage means SM11b. If Yes in step 2619, the background effect display control unit SM23 clears the counter value of the awake stage stay counter SM 23c to zero in step 2620, and proceeds to step 2618. Next, in step 2618, background effect display control means S
M23 refers to the flag area of the background rendering related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns off the awake stage flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2999). Also in the case of No at step 2619, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2999).

On the other hand, if No in step 2604, in step 2621 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether the demon stage flag is off. If Yes in step 2621, in step 2622, the background effect display control unit SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage unit SM11b and determines whether or not the demon stage transition command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2622, in step 2624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "devil stage" as a stay stage. Next, in step 2626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 has been received from the main side. . If YES in step 2626, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets the counter value of the received limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 in the demon stage stay counter SM23c-2 in step 2628, and shifts to step 2634. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the devil stage gaming state informing value determination table in step 2630 and determines the devil stage gaming state informing value by lottery. Here, the lower part of the same figure is an example of a demon stage game state notification value determining table. As shown in the figure, the demon stage game state notification value is configured such that two values of 10 and 30 can be selected, and 30 is more easily selected than 10 (the game state is In the case of probability fluctuation gaming state, a large value is easily selected). Next, in step 2632, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the determined demon stage game state notification value to the demon stage stay counter SM 23c-2 and step 2634.
Migrate to In addition, when executing the processing of step 2630, it is added that the gaming state on the main side is the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state.

Next, at step 2634, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the demon stage flag, and proceeds to step 2636. Also in the case of No at step 2621, the process proceeds to step 2636. Next, in step 2636, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the demon stage stay counter SM23c-2 and determines whether the counter value is zero or not. In addition, the counter value of Devil Stage Stay Counter SM23c-2 is every one change (every stop of the main game symbol)
It is configured to be decremented by one. If Yes in step 2636, then the process moves to step 2638. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2636, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game is won with reference to the main information temporary storage means SM11b at step 2639. In the case of Yes at step 2639, the background effect display control means SM23 clears the counter value of the demon stage stay counter SM 23c-2 to zero at step 2640, and proceeds to step 2638. Next, in step 2638, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns the demon stage flag off, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). Also in the case of No at step 2639, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999).

On the other hand, if the result of step 2622 is No, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the main information temporary storage means SM11 b in step 2641 and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the probability fluctuation gaming state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2641, in step 2642, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a "probable change stage" (a stay stage which can stay in the probability variation gaming state) as a stay stage, and executes the next process (step Transfer to 2999). On the other hand, if No in step 2641, step 2
At 644, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "non-probability change stage" (the stay stage which can be kept in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state) as the stay stage, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999) Do.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of losing symbols relating to the first main game are provided, and in the non-time shortening gaming state, one losing symbol (in this example, “HA If it is determined, the variation mode may differ depending on the number of reservations at the time of the variation related to the lost symbol, and the variation time may be relatively short, and the other lost symbol (book In the example, when "HB" is determined, the variation mode does not differ depending on the number of reservations at the time of the variation related to the lost symbol, and the variation time is relatively long. By transmitting the variation mode group and the variation mode random number division information to the sub-side at the occurrence of the hold, the selection tendency of the variation mode can be differentiated by the determined loss pattern, and the variation mode By the flop and fluctuation mode random delimiter information, it will be able to determine whether to execute prefetching lottery, so that it is reduced data capacity.

  In the present embodiment, there is a time saving gaming state in which the second main game hold is present in the hold, and a hold is a big hit in the hold as a prohibition rule condition of the pre-reading lottery (pre-selection lottery at the time of winning). (Excluding a newly generated hold), a hold with information indicating that the trigger hold is present in the hold, etc. is exemplified, but the prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery is not limited to this, for example, The prohibition condition may be the probability variation gaming state, the execution of a predetermined background effect, the number of main game reservations being equal to or less than a predetermined number, the execution of a predetermined reach effect, or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery timing of the prefetch lottery is the winning timing of the game ball to the main game start port (first main game start port A10), but it is not limited thereto. Fluctuation stop timing (decorative symbol fluctuation stop timing), a predetermined timing in the middle of the fluctuation of the main gaming symbol (predetermined timing during the decorative symbol fluctuation), a fluctuation start timing of the main gaming symbol (decorative symbol fluctuation start timing) It may be as well.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that it can transfer to limitation frequency after completion | finish of a predetermined big hit (4A, 5A, 3B, 4B), and big hit other than a predetermined big hit (3A, 7A, 9A, 5B, 7B) It is configured not to shift to the limited frequency after completion.

Second Embodiment
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols relating to the first main game and one type of lost symbols relating to the second main game are selected, but the selection of the variation mode based on the types of lost symbols and the determined lost symbols. The tendency is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration which becomes a selection tendency of a variation mode based on the type of lost symbol different from the present embodiment and the determined lost symbol is set as a second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Do. The game machine according to the second embodiment is not a game machine of a type in which the probability fluctuation gaming state continues until the next big hit occurs, but the probability fluctuation gaming state is for a predetermined number of revolutions (for example, 80 times symbol) In the case where a big hit does not occur even while the fluctuation is performed, it is added that the gaming machine is a type of gaming machine that shifts to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state (a so-called ST type gaming machine). Further, during the period in which the probability variation gaming state continues, it is a game characteristic in which transition from a certain limited frequency state to another limited frequency state occurs. Furthermore, since the second embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it should be added that the second embodiment can be applied to any configuration shown in the present embodiment.

First, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second) of FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1464, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c to determine whether the counter value G is a value within the first step range (80 ≧ G> 50). . In the case of Yes in step 1464, in step 1466, the restriction frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the restriction frequency fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN 52ta (limit frequency table A-1) and determines the main gaming side random number and the result of the lottery Based on it, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process moves to step 1474.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1464, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c at step 1468, and the counter value G is a value within the second step range (50>G> 10). Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 1468, in step 1470, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determining lottery table MN 52ta (limited frequency table A-2), and the main game side random number, the result of winning lottery, The variation mode (variation time) relating to the main gaming symbol is determined based on the number of balls held on the second main gaming side and the stop symbol relating to the main gaming symbol, and the process moves to step 1474.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1468, in other words, when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the third step range (10 ≧ G), at step 1472 the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 Lottery table MN52ta (limit frequency table A-3 for mode determination)
), And based on the main gaming side random number and the result of the lottery, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main gaming symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1474.

  Next, in step 1474, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c to determine whether the counter value G is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in step 1476, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 turns off the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b, and executes the next process (step Transition to processing). Also in the case of No at step 1474, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 33 is an example of a variation mode determination lottery table (main game table 1) referred to in FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, there are a plurality of lost symbols on the first main game side (in this example, three types of "HA", "HB" and "HC"), and further, There are also multiple (in this example, three types of “HD”, “HE” and “HF” in this example) lost symbols on the second main game side (furthermore, lost symbols on the first main game side) The number is the same as the number of lost symbols on the second main game side). Also, in the second embodiment, in the lost symbol on the first main game (second main game) side, the proportion of "HA" ("HD") is greater than the proportion of "HB" ("HE"), The ratio of "HB" ("HE") is configured to be greater than the ratio of "HC" ("HF"). Further, in the second embodiment, the selection tendency of the variation mode may be different depending on the lost symbol (details will be described later).

Next, FIGS. 34 to 37 are examples of the variation mode determination lottery table (main game table 2) referred to in FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, the limited frequency table (lottery table MN52ta for determining the limited frequency variation mode) in the second embodiment differs from the present embodiment in that the limited frequency table A-1, the limited frequency table A-2, the limitation It consists of a frequency table A-3 and a limited frequency table B, and when it changes to a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state (advantage state A) after the end of the special game, based on the number of changes in the main gaming symbol , A limited frequency table to be referred to in the order of "limited frequency table A-1 → limited frequency table A-2 → limited frequency table A-3" is switched. More specifically, the limited frequency table A-1 is a table that can be referred to when the value (for example, G) of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 50). In the limit frequency table A-2, the limit frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50 ≧ G> 10).
The limit frequency table A-3 is a table that can be referenced when the limit frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (10 ≧ G). When referring to the limited frequency table A-1 and the limited frequency table A-3, the variation mode is determined regardless of the number of reservations, and on the other hand, when referring to the limited frequency table A-2, it is suspended. It is comprised so that the variation aspect may differ with numbers.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 35 (especially, FIG. 35), in this example, in the variation mode determination table on the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, the result of the lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “ In the case of “HA”, it is configured that a variation mode that is a short time (in this example, a variation time is 15 seconds or less) is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation is easily selected) . On the other hand, in the non-time reduction gaming state, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC”, the determination symbol is relatively long for a longer time than in the case of “HA”. ) Is configured to be easy to select (that is, an effect with a relatively high probability of being a big hit is easy to be selected). Furthermore, in the non-time shortening gaming state, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, a variation mode other than a specific variation mode (in this example, a variation mode in which the variation time is 60 seconds) is It is configured to be easy to select.

Here, in the variation mode of the first main game (second main game) side in the non-time shortening gaming state (time shortening gaming state), the success or failure lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is “HA” (“HD”) With regard to the suspension that is), it is configured that the fluctuation time can be relatively different depending on the number of reservations at the time of suspension digestion, and the result of the success or failure lottery is lost and the lost symbol is “HB” or “HC” (“HE” or “HF In the case of “pending”, the fluctuation time is configured to be relatively difficult to differ depending on the number of pendings at the time of the pending digest. For example, with regard to the first main gaming symbol variation (second main gaming symbol variation) during the non-time shortening gaming state (time shortening gaming state), the success or failure lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is “HA” (“HD”) In the case, the contents of the variation mode determination table to be referred to are switched according to the number of reservations on the first main game side (variation mode to be referred to in the case of 0 to 1 and 2 to 3). It is configured to change the contents of the decision table). Specifically, when the determined symbol is "HA"("HD"), the variation time (and the presentation mode) may differ depending on the number of reservations at the start of the variation. If it is configured to be indeterminate {if the decision symbol is “HB” or “HC” (“HE” or “HF”), the variation time (and the presentation mode) regardless of the number of reservations at the time of reservation ) Is configured so that it can be determined. In addition, it is not limited to this, in the fluctuation mode of the 1st main game (the 2nd main game) side in non time shortening game state (during time reduction game state), the success or failure lottery result loses and the lost symbol “ With regard to the suspension being “HA” or “HB” (“HD” or “HE”), the fluctuation time can be made to be relatively different depending on the number of reservations at the time of the reserve digestion, and the result of the lottery is a lost and lost design With regard to the hold that is “HC” (“HF”), the fluctuation time may be configured to be relatively difficult to differ depending on the number of holds at the time of the hold digestion.

  On the other hand, in the fluctuation mode of the first main game side in the non-time shortening gaming state, the fluctuation time is long fluctuation (for example, 60 seconds or more) in the normal time with regard to the case where the lost symbol is “HB” or “HC”. While the reach effect to be) is easy to be selected, at the limited frequency (when the limited frequency B flag is on), as shown in the limited frequency table B, the fluctuation time has a long fluctuation (for example, 60 seconds) It is configured that it is difficult to select the reach effect to be the above.

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, at the time of losing, the limited frequency table A-3 is easier to select the fluctuation time in a shorter time than the limited frequency table A-2, so that the limited frequency table A- 1 is easier to select a shorter fluctuation time than the limited frequency table A-3. By configuring in this way, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, it is determined that the gaming state will continue until the next special game is won, so the predetermined period {this example Then, from the end of the special game to the end of the 30th fluctuation (from the start of the 31st fluctuation to the end of the 70th fluctuation)} when the jackpot is not won, the table to be referred to is a limited frequency table A- Since the fluctuation time changes relatively by switching from 1 to the limited frequency table A-2 (limited frequency table A-2 to limited frequency table A-3), the time until winning a big hit changes, and the game It can reduce the fatigue of people.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 37, regarding the second main game symbol variation, at the time of “HF” (and “HE”) symbol determination, in the time-saving gaming state, the variation time becomes a relatively long variation While a mode is easy to be selected, in the non-time shortening gaming state, a fluctuation mode in which fluctuation time is relatively short fluctuation is configured to be easily selected.

  In the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time shortening gaming state, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the determination symbol is “HB”, the relative is more than the determination symbol is “HA”. Of the fluctuation time which is a long time (in this example, fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more) is easy to be selected (that is, it is easy to be selected the production with a relatively high expectation of big hit), and The average value is configured to be relatively long. Moreover, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the case of the non-time shortening gaming state, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is more than “HA”. A predetermined variation mode (for example, a variation mode of 120 seconds) which is a long time is configured to be easily selected.

  In addition, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, relative to the case where the decision symbol is "HA" and "HB" when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the decision symbol is "HC" in the non-time shortening gaming state. It is easy to select a fluctuation mode that has a long time (in this example, fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) (that is, an effect with a relatively high expectation for a big hit is easily selected), and an average of the selected fluctuation time The values are configured to be relatively long. Also, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC” in the non-time shortening gaming state, the determination symbol is “HA” and “HB”. The predetermined fluctuation mode (for example, the fluctuation mode which becomes 120 seconds) which is longer than in the case of is easily selected.

  Also, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, in the case of the non-time shortening gaming state, if the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is "HB", the determined symbol is "HA" It is easy to select the fluctuation mode that is relatively long time (in this example, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more) (that is, the effect that the jackpot expectation is relatively high is easy to be selected) and the fluctuation selected The average value of time is configured to be relatively long. Moreover, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the case of the non-time shortening gaming state, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is more than “HA”. A predetermined variation mode (for example, a variation mode of 120 seconds) which is a long time is configured to be easily selected.

In addition, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, relative to the case where the decision symbol is "HA" and "HB" when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the decision symbol is "HC" in the non-time shortening gaming state. It is easy to select a fluctuation mode that has a long time (in this example, fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) (that is, an effect with a relatively high expectation for a big hit is easily selected), and an average of the selected fluctuation time The values are configured to be relatively long. Also, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC” in the non-time shortening gaming state, the determination symbol is “HA” and “HB”. The predetermined fluctuation mode (for example, the fluctuation mode which becomes 120 seconds) which is longer than in the case of is easily selected. Here, in the second embodiment, there are a plurality of jackpot symbols related to the second main game symbol variation, and further, in different jackpot symbols, the degree of advantage for the player is different (in this example, for example, the jackpot symbol is In the case of 3B, 2R short opening big hit becomes relatively low, and when the big hitting design is 7B, 16R long opening big hit becomes relatively high advantage). Under such circumstances, when, in the non-time shortening gaming state, a specific effect {for example, reach effect or fluctuation having a relatively long fluctuation) occurs in the second main game symbol fluctuation. If the particular effect does not result in a high advantage jackpot, it may be configured to be a relatively low jackpot (or a relatively low advantage jackpot). (As a premise, in the second main game symbol fluctuation at the time of the loss in the non-time shortening gaming state, regardless of the type of the symbol determined at the time of the loss, the specific effect is not executed or difficult to execute There is

  In the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time shortening gaming state, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the determination symbol is “HB”, the relative is more than the determination symbol is “HA”. Of the fluctuation time which is a long time (in this example, fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more) is easy to be selected (that is, it is easy to be selected the production with a relatively high expectation of big hit), and The average value is configured to be relatively long. Also, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the case of non-time shortening gaming state, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is “HA” The predetermined variation mode (for example, the variation mode of 120 seconds) which is also long time is configured to be easily selected.

  In addition, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, relative to the case where the decision symbol is "HA" and "HB" when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the decision symbol is "HC" in the non-time shortening gaming state. It is easy to select a fluctuation mode that has a long time (in this example, fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) (that is, an effect with a relatively high expectation for a big hit is easily selected), and an average of the selected fluctuation time The values are configured to be relatively long. Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC” in the non-time shortening gaming state, the determination symbol is “HA” and “HB”. The predetermined variation mode (for example, the variation mode of 120 seconds), which takes a longer time than in the case of “1”, is configured to be easily selected.

  Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HE” in the time reduction gaming state, the determination symbol is more than “HD”. A variation mode having a relatively long time (in this example, a variation time of 30 seconds or more) tends to be selected (that is, a presentation with a relatively high expectation for a big hit tends to be selected), and a variation time selected The average value of is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HE” in the time reduction gaming state, the determination symbol is more than “HD”. A predetermined variation mode (for example, a variation mode of 120 seconds) which is a long time is configured to be easily selected.

  In addition, regarding the variation aspect of the second main game side, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HF” in the time reduction gaming state, the determination symbol is relatively more than in the case of “HD” and “HE”. A variation mode with a long time (in this example, a variation time of 60 seconds or more) tends to be selected (that is, a presentation with a relatively high probability of big hit is likely to be selected), and an average value of the selected variation time Is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is "HF" in the time reduction gaming state, the determination symbol is "HD" and "HE" The predetermined fluctuation mode (for example, the fluctuation mode which becomes 120 seconds) which is longer than in the case of is easily selected.

  In addition, in this example, in the case of a change related to the loss of the main game symbol, and in the case of two or three balls being held, the change time (5 seconds) and the third step which are most easily selected in the second step of the three step ST. In the most easily selected fluctuation time (20 seconds), the third stage has a longer fluctuation time. On the other hand, the fluctuation related to the jackpot of the main game design, and in the case of two or three holding balls, it is most selected in the third phase with the fluctuation time (60 seconds) most likely to be selected in the second phase of the three phase ST. In the easy fluctuation time (20 seconds), the second stage is a longer fluctuation time.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1554 (second) to step 1560 (second) and step 1580 (second). First, in step 1554 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c to determine whether the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1554 (second), in step 1556 (second), the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1558 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. If Yes in step 1558 (second), in step 1560 (second), the specified game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b, step Migrate to 1570. Also in the case of No in step 1554 (second) or step 1558 (second), the process moves to step 1570. On the other hand, after the auxiliary game time short flag is turned off in step 1578, in step 1580 (second), the specified game control means MP50 is a specified game end command (a command to the sub side, the specified game is ended, usually Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information to the sub main control unit SM to the command indicating that it is in the gaming state (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999) And move on to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1605 (second) and step 1615 (second). That is, after turning off the specific game flag at step 1604, the special game control means MP30 clears the count value of the probability variation counter MP51c to zero at step 1605 (second), and shifts to step 1606. On the other hand, after the condition device activation flag is turned off in step 1614, in step 1615 (second), the special game control means MP30 is a specified game end command (a command to the sub side, the specified game is ended, usually Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information to the sub main control unit SM to the command indicating that it is in the gaming state (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999) And move on to the next process (the process of step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 20 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is the same as step 1755 (second), step 1761 (second), step 1763 (second), step 1779 (second), step 1783-1 (second) and step 1783-2 (Second). That is, after turning on the main game probability change flag in step 1754, in step 1755 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets the fixed number of times counter MP51 c a predetermined number of times (80 times), and shifts to step 1756 . On the other hand, if Yes in step 1756 or Yes in step 1776, in step 1761 (second), the specified game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter AMN 52c a predetermined number of times (80 times), and shifts to step 1762.

  On the other hand, after the limit frequency A flag is turned on in step 1762, in step 1763 (second), the specified game control means MP 50 is a specified game start command (a command to the sub side, the specified game starts, probability Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM the command related to the information indicating that the variable gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are reached) (Sub main control unit by control command transmission processing of step 1999 Send to the SM side). Next, in step 1779 (second), the specified game control means MP50 sets the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (80 times), and proceeds to step 1778.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1776, in step 1783-1 (second), the specified game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 a predetermined number of times (30 times). Next, in step 1783-2 (second), the specific game control unit MP50 turns on the limitation frequency B flag in the flag area of the limitation frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and shifts to step 1784. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the short open jackpot (3A, 3B) is won during the ST, the probability variation counter MP51c is reset a predetermined number of times (80 in this example), and the limitation is limited. Although the frequency counter value will increase from 0, on the other hand, if the small hit is won, the limited frequency counter value will not be cleared, and the limited frequency counter value before the small hit will be handed over .

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination prefetching determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 of FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the step 2161 (second), and the purpose thereof is to make all the suspension before the suspension to be a target of the pre-reading lottery be a short fluctuation time. That is, when there is no hold that will be a big hit in the hold of the first main game side before the new hold in step 2160, in step 2161 (second), the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k With reference to the hold information temporary storage means SM22b, all stop symbols of the hold of the first main game side before the new hold are all "HA" (the first main game side where the fluctuation time in the shortest time is relatively easy to be selected It is determined whether or not it is a lost design of In the case of Yes in step 2161 (second), the process proceeds to step 2162, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112). In this example, the reservation pre-reading lottery can be executed only when all the first main game side's holding before the new holding is the holding for the lost HA, but For example, the present invention is not limited, for example, only when the first main gaming side hold before the new hold is all hold for a lost HA and is group 1 hold (hold corresponding to the division 1 or 2). , And may be configured to be able to perform a pending read lottery.

Next, FIG. 42 is a flow chart of second main game winning prediction time pre-reading determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the step 2207-1 (second), step 2207-2 (second), step 2223 (second) to step 2230 (second), step 2232 (second) to step 2238 (Second) and Step 2240 (Second) The purpose is to make the execution mode of the prefetch lottery different depending on the stay stage during the specific game (during the time-saving gaming state). That is, in the case of Yes in step 2206, in step 2207-1 (second), pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b, and the second main before the new pending It is determined whether or not the stop symbols on the game side are all "HD" (the second main game side lost symbol which is relatively easy to select the fluctuation time in the shortest time). If Yes in step 2207-1 (the second), in step 2207-2 (the second), the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26 k refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23 b and is currently set. It is determined whether or not the stay stage is a "long effect stage" (a stay stage where the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table A-2). If Yes in step 2207-2 (second), the process moves to step 2208. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2207-2 (second), at step 2223 (second), pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26 k refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23 b and is currently set. It is determined whether or not the stay stage is a "fixed effect stage" (a stay stage where the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table A-3). If Yes in step 2223 (the second), in the step 2224 (the second), the reserve pre-reading effect executability decision means SM 26 k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM 22 b and the new pending is a big hit pending It is determined whether the In the case of Yes in step 2224 (the second), in step 2226 (the second), the suspension pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26 k executes the winning pre-selection lottery to be won with a predetermined probability (1/4 in this example). , Shift to step 2220. On the other hand, if No in step 2224 (the second) (ie, the new hold is a hold that causes a loss), in step 2230 (the second), the hold ahead reading effect executability judging means SM26k has a predetermined probability (the In this example, a prize pre-selection lottery to be won in 1/6) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2220. In the case of No at step 2223 (second) {ie, when the currently set stay stage is the “short effect stage” (the stage referring to the limited frequency table A-1), the next process It transfers to (the process of step 2112). In the present embodiment, the reservation pre-reading lottery can be executed only when all the second main gaming side's suspension before the new suspension is the suspension for the lost HD, but For example, it is not limited, for example, only when the second main gaming side hold before the new hold is all hold for lost HD and hold of group A (hold corresponding to the division 1 or 2) , And may be configured to be able to perform a pending read lottery.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2232 (second), the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM26k refers to the number of reservations temporarily stored in the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22 b and Deriving the number Ha (0 to 4) of fluctuation stoppages of the main gaming symbol until the winning hold (trigger hold) is digested. Next, in step 2234 (second), the reserve prefetching effect executability determination means SM26k refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c-3, and based on the counter value, the main game symbol until the current stay stage is ended. The number Hb of fluctuation stops is derived. Next, in step 2236 (second), the pending look-ahead rendering executability judging means SM26k is for the number of times the pre-reading rendering is executed (Ha in this example) to be the minimum number of pre-reading renderings (effective pre-reading rendering) It is determined whether or not the number is the minimum number, for example, two or more. If Yes in step 2236 (second), in step 2238 (second), the reserve prefetching effect executability judging means SM 26 k satisfies the relation of Ha ≦ Hb that the derived Ha and Hb have derived (prefetching effect Determine if the current stay stage ends). If Yes in step 2238 (second), in step 2222 the reserve prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM 26 k is in the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM 22 b and holds the new reserve winning winning prediction lottery at the time of winning. Temporarily stores information indicating that the trigger is "pending hold". Next, in step 2240 (second), the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k sets Ha to the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26 c, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2112). Step 2207-1 (second), step 22
Also in the case of No in 36 (second) or step 2238 (second), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when staying at the “short effect stage”, the prefetch lottery is not performed. In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and it is not limited to this, for example, even if it is comprised so that it can perform pre-reading lottery in a "short effect stage" without performing pre-reading lottery in a "fixed effect stage". Good.

As described above, in the second embodiment, “HA” and “HD” of the suspension relating to the loss are configured to be excluded from the target of the pre-reading lottery (because it does not become the group 3) ). The present invention is not limited to this, and "HA" and "HD" may be targets of the pre-reading lottery. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the configuration be made so that it is more difficult to win the advance lottery than the other lost symbols. Moreover, in the case of the prefetch lottery related to the first main game, “HC” is more than “HB”, and in the case of the prefetch lottery related to the second main game, “HF” is more group 3 than “HE”. Since the probability of being selected is high (because there are many random numbers), it is configured to be easy to win the pre-reading lottery. In addition, the stop symbol of suspension which is digested before trigger suspension is all “HA” in the case of the prefetch lottery relating to the first main game and all “HD” in the case of the prefetch lottery relating to the first main game. Further, the prefetch lottery according to the second main game side is configured not to execute the prefetch lottery when the stay stage is different from the present when the holding to be the target of the prefetch lottery is digested.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2350 (second). That is, after the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol are determined in step 2306 and temporarily stored in the costume display-related information temporary storage means SM 21 b, the costume display content determination means SM 21 n will be described later During the pre-reading execution of the effect contents determination processing is performed.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of pre-reading executing effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second) of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. First, at step 2352, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23 b, and the specific game in progress flag (the specific game in progress flag turns on at step 2656) Is determined to be off. In the case of Yes at step 2352, the figure display content determination means SM21n determines at step 2364 whether or not the counter value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c is larger than zero. If YES in step 2364, the figure display content determining means SM21n subtracts 1 from the value of the prefetch presentation effect execution counter SM26c in step 2366 (decrement). Next, in step 2368, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether the currently set stay stage is the "long effect stage" or not. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2368, in step 2370, the costume display content determination means SM21 n pre-read effects for exclusive use of the “long effect stage” (for example, “after xxx times at the start of fluctuation” and pre-reading effect execution counter SM26 c The command to display the effect of counting down the value of is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2368, in other words, when performing pre-reading effect in the "fixed effect stage", in step 2372 the suspension pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not the "fixed effect stage" changes The presentation content at the stage is determined as the prefetching presentation dedicated to the stage (for example, the presentation in which the background display color changes based on the big hit expectation, etc.), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). Also in the case of No at step 2352 or step 2364, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2308).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of stay stage look-ahead executing content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not a specific game start command has been received from the main side {in this example, the main side is not Determine whether or not the transition to the probability fluctuation / time shortening gaming state from the probability fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state}. If Yes in step 2652, in step 2654 the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2656, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the specific game in-progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2666.

  Here, the specific game in progress flag is a flag indicating that the specific game (for example, the probability change gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, so-called ST) state is in, and is turned on with the start of the specific game. It is configured to be turned off when the value of the big hit or stay stage management counter SM23c exceeds the upper limit value (for example, 80 which is the upper limit number of times of ST).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the specific game end command has been received from the main side in step 2658 {for example, with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b Judgment or Judgment Whether the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c has exceeded the upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of times of ST). In the case of Yes in step 2658, in step 2660, the background effect display control means SM23 resets (zero clears) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2666. Also in the case of No at step 2658, the process proceeds to step 2666.

  Next, in step 2666, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the specific game in progress flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2666, in step 2668, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol has newly stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2668, in step 2670, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c (increment), and proceeds to step 2672. On the other hand, if the result of step 2668 is NO, the process proceeds to step 2672 without executing the process of step 2670.

  Next, in step 2672, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c and determines whether or not the counter value is a value (1 to 30) within the first range. In the case of Yes in step 2672, in step 2674, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "short effect stage" as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2999) Move to

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2672, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c at step 2676 and whether or not the counter value is a value (31 to 70) within the second range. Determine if If Yes in step 2676, in step 2678, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "long effect stage" as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2999) Move to

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2676, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM 23c at step 2680, and the counter value is within the third range (71 to 80). Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2680, in step 2682 the background effect display control means SM23 sets "fixed effect stage" as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2999) Move to Incidentally, also in the case of No in step 2666 or step 2680 (for example, in the case of not being in the specific game), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2999).

(Action)
Next, the operation of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a prefetching effect in a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where the specific game is ended without being won in the big hit is illustrated.

First, under the condition of being in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the holding ball on the first main game side is digested, and after the holding balls on the second main game side become four, at the timing 1 in the figure. , And the second main game symbol will start to change. Next, at timing 2 in the drawing, the short effect stage ends and the transition to the long effect stage is triggered by the fact that the main game symbol has changed 30 times after the special game.

  Next, at the timing 3 in the drawing, it is judged whether or not the pre-reading effect execution is possible since the trigger suspension which can be the trigger for the pre-reading effect is generated. In this timing, since the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger reserve processing is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb before the end of the long rendering stage is 40 (Ha ≦ Hb), the pre-reading effect is executed. It will be done. Next, at timing 4 in the drawing, since the first change of the second main game symbol starts after the execution of the pre-read effect is determined, the pre-read effect is executed from the change.

  Next, at the timing 5 in the drawing, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to the digestion of the trigger hold is started. The fluctuation related to the trigger suspension is a loss, and the fluctuation related to the trigger suspension in the long rendering stage is a fluctuation time of 10 seconds or more, so it is a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Next, at timing 6 in the drawing, the pre-reading effect is ended when the change of the main gaming symbol related to the trigger suspension is ended.

  Next, at the timing 7 in the drawing, it is judged whether or not the pre-reading effect execution is possible, since the trigger suspension that can be an execution trigger of the pre-reading effect has occurred. In this timing, since the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger reserve processing is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long rendering stage is 1 (Ha> Hb), the pre-reading effect is executed. It will not be done. Next, at timing 8 in the drawing, the long rendering stage ends and the transition to the fixed rendering stage is triggered by the fact that the main gaming symbol has changed 70 times after the special game.

  Next, at the timing 9 in the drawing, it is judged whether or not the pre-reading effect execution is possible, since the trigger suspension which can be an execution trigger of the pre-reading effect has occurred. In this timing, since the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 2 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the fixed rendering stage is 10 is (Ha ≦ Hb), the pre-reading effect is executed. It will be done. Next, at timing 10 in the drawing, since the first change of the second main game symbol starts after the execution of the advance effect is determined, the advance effect is executed from the change. Next, at timing 11 in the drawing, the pre-reading effect is ended, triggered by the end of the fluctuation of the main gaming symbol related to the trigger suspension. In addition, since the said pre-reading effect is pre-reading effect in a fixed effect stage, the fluctuation time concerning trigger suspension is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing of 12 in the drawing, the fixed effect stage ends, and the specific game also ends, triggered by the fact that the main game symbol has changed 80 times after the special game.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, three types of losing symbols are provided on each of the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side, and the probability fluctuation gaming state and time reduction are realized. In the gaming state, by configuring to switch the limited frequency table (table for determining the variation mode) to be referred to by the number of changes from the end of the special game, the nature of the lost symbol can be differentiated by the limited frequency table to refer At the same time, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the pre-reading lottery by the fluctuation mode group and the fluctuation mode random number division information, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, when the pre-reading effect straddles the end of the stay stage, the pre-reading effect is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the pre-reading effect is appropriately performed. By doing this, it is possible to produce an effect that further enhances the interest of the game. Therefore, such a configuration is taken as a first modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of second main game winning combination prefetching determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 24 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2242 (second change 1), step 2244 (second change 1), step 2246 (second change 1) and step 2248 (second change 1). That is, in step 2222, information indicating that “trigger is on hold” is added to the new hold winning the pre-winning lottery at the time of winning and temporarily stored, and then in step 2242 (second change 1) The availability determination unit SM26k refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage unit SM22b to determine whether the new suspension is a large hit or not (in addition, as the other configuration, the new suspension is a large hit). It may be determined whether or not it is a hold, or if it is a hold that causes a loss and if the loss symbol is "HF"). In the case of Yes in step 2242 (the second variation 1), the process shifts to step 2240 (the second). On the other hand, if the result of step 2242 (the second change 1) is No (that is, the new hold is a hold that causes a loss), the step 2244 (the second change 1) causes the reserve prefetch effect execution control means SM26 to It is determined whether or not Ha ≦ Hb, in other words, whether or not the hold that has won the pre-reading effect drawing is digested during the current stay stage. In the case of Yes in step 2244 (the second modification 1), in step 2246 (the second modification 1), the suspension pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 sets Ha to the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26 c, and the next processing (step 2122 Transition to processing). On the other hand, if No in step 2244 (the second change 1), in step 2248 (the second change 1), the pre-hold presentation effect execution control means SM26 sets Hb to the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26 c, and the next process (step (Processing of 2112).

  By changing as described above, in the modification example 1 from the second embodiment, when the pre-reading effect concerning the big hit is executed, the pre-reading effect is planned to be executed across the next stay stage even when the pre-reading effect is executed In the same manner as in the case where it is executed without being executed, on the other hand, when the pre-reading effect relating to a loss (so-called, Gase effect) is executed, the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed across the next stay stage. The pre-reading effect is configured to end at the final change in the stay stage, and various pre-reading effects are executed, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Further, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, when the pre-reading effect relating to the big hit is performed, it is also performed as it is when the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be performed across the next stay stage, When the pre-reading effect concerned is scheduled to be executed over the next stay stage when the pre-reading effect pertaining to is executed, the pre-reading effect is ended by the final change in the current stay stage, When the pre-reading effect is executed at the final change, and when the pre-reading effect is continuously executed at the next change, it is determined that the pre-reading effect is the pre-reading effect relating to the big hit. Therefore, the player pays attention to the change of the change of the stay stage, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In the present embodiment, after the pre-reading effect lottery is performed, it is judged whether or not the pre-reading effect is executable (and whether or not to be interrupted) according to the determination as to whether or not to cross the stay stage. The order of the processing relating to the pre-reading effect may be changed as appropriate, and for example, the pre-reading effect lottery may be executed after it is determined that the stay stage is to be straddled.

In the first modification example from the second embodiment, when the prefetching effect is executed across the next stay stages, it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit, and the process ends without crossing over the next stay stages. It is configured to be decisive to become a loss, but it is not limited to this, conversely, to be a big hit if it ends without straddling the next stay stage It may be configured, and it may be configured to be able to win both a big hit and a lose if the pre-reading effect crosses the next stay stage, or even if there is no stride, even if the expectation of becoming a big hit is different. Good (for example, when the pre-reading effect is executed across the stay stage, the possibility of the change relating to the pre-reading becoming a big hit is higher than the possibility of losing). In addition, when the pre-reading effect is to be ended by the final change in the current stay stage at the time of pre-reading effect relating to the big hit, the big hit is determined by the change relating to the big hit pending (trigger pending) It may be configured to execute an effect (for example, a notification sound generation of a big hit determination, a feature falling of a big hit determination, etc.).

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, during the specific game, each stay stage is always switched in the same pattern, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and by providing a plurality of effect switching patterns in the specific game, the game is It is possible to further enhance the interest. Therefore, such a configuration is taken as a second modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 23 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2525 (second variation) and step 2650 (second variation). That is, in step 2514, based on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit in execution and the big hit symbol in suspension, after setting the command to display the effect related to the special game being executed, step 2525 (second change 2 The background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the jackpot is the first hit (a jackpot in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state). If Yes in step 2525 (second variant 2), in step 2650 (second variant 2), the background effect display control means SM23 performs an effect mode determining process to be described later, and proceeds to step 2516. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2525 (the second variation 2), the processing shifts to step 2516.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of effect mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second modification 2) of FIG. 48 in the second modification of the second embodiment. First, at step 2652, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the special game round being executed is the effect mode selection round (in this example, the first R). Determine In the case of Yes in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command relating to the image display prompting selection of the effect mode in step 2654 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing in step 2999) Be done). Next, in step 2656, the background effect display control unit SM23 determines whether or not the sub input button SB is newly pressed with reference to the sub input button input detection device SBs. In the case of Yes in step 2656, in step 2658, the background effect display control means SM23 switches the effect mode that has been set (for example, battle mode → escape mode, escape mode → battle mode), and shifts to step 2660. Even when the result of step 2652 or step 2656 is No, the process proceeds to step 2660.

  Here, in the present example, the “battle mode” is set at the start of the effect mode selection round, and if a power failure occurs after the effect mode is determined, “Battle is the default effect mode after the power failure return. Mode is configured to be reset.

  Next, at step 2660, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and the special game round being executed is the effect mode determination round (in this example, the second R). Determine if If YES in step 2660, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets a command for displaying the effect mode set at the end of the effect mode selection round in step 2662 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub sub It is transmitted to the control unit SS side, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2516). Also in the case of No at step 2660, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2516).

  By changing as described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, a plurality of effect content determination tables are provided in a certain stay stage, and the effect mode is determined with reference to which effect content table during the special game. It is possible for the player to arbitrarily select whether or not to perform, so that the variation in presentation during the specific game is increased, and it is possible to execute the presentation according to the player's preference Interest will be enhanced.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, although the number of times of change to be in the time reduction gaming state after the end of the special game and the number of times of change to be in the probability fluctuation gaming state are always the same, the invention is not limited thereto. It is possible to create new playability by making the number of changes in time-saving gaming state after the end of the special game different from the number of changes in probability-changing gaming state. Therefore, such a configuration is set as a modification example 3 from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below. In addition, in the example 3 of a change from a 2nd embodiment, it is constituted so that it does not have limited frequency B time (a mode which becomes limited frequency B as limited frequency), and 2nd embodiment is a big hit symbol The contents (playing state to shift after the big hit end) is configured to be different.

  First, FIG. 50 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 9 in the third modification from the second embodiment. Display processing). The change points from the second embodiment are step 1413 (second change), step 1415 (second change), step 1450 (second change), step 1417 (second change), and step 1850 (second change). 2) 3). That is, after determining the stop symbol related to the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming symbol equality lottery result and the first main gaming content determination random number (second main gaming content determination random number) in step 1410, step 1413 (second modification 3) The first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) determines whether the count value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1413 (the second modification), in step 1415 (the second modification), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 is a specific game type flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. (Long specified game flag, similar short specified game flag, short specified game flag) is turned off, and the process moves to step 1416. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1413 (second variant 3), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 executes limited frequency A variation mode decision processing described later in step 1450 (second variant 3). Next, in step 1417 (the second variation 3), the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52 c, and proceeds to step 1418.

  If the stop symbol is a big hit symbol in step 1436, then in step 1850 (second variation 3), limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 executes limited frequency type determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 1438. Do.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second modification 3) of FIG. 50 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, at step 1478, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b to determine whether or not the long specifying game flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1478, in step 1479, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c, and the counter value G is within the first step range (80 ≧ G> 50 in this example). It is determined whether it is a value. In the case of Yes in step 1479, in step 1480, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency table A-1 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and determines the main gaming side random number and the win / fall lottery result. Based on the determination, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1417 (the second modification 3)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1479, in step 1482, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c, and the counter value G falls within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10 in this example). It is determined whether or not the value of. In the case of Yes in step 1482, in step 1483, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency table A- 2 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN 52 ta, and the main game side random number, the result of the lottery result, Based on the number of balls held on the second main game side, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main gaming symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 1417 (second modification 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1482, at step 1484, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency table A-3 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and the main gaming side random number Based on the result, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main gaming symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1417 (the second variation 3)}. Note that the process of the steps 1478 to 1484 is a process of determining the variation aspect relating to the long identification game.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1478, at step 1486, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b and determines whether or not the short specific game flag is on. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1486, in step 1487, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 is in the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). Determine the variation mode (variation time) about the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming side random number and the result of the lottery with reference to the main gaming table 3, and shift to the next processing {processing of step 1417 (second modification 3)} Do. Note that the process of the step 1486 and the step 1487 is a process of determining the variation aspect relating to the short specified game.

  In the case of No in step 1486, in other words, in the case where the similar short specific game flag is on, in step 1488, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c, and the counter value G It is determined whether the value is within a one-step range (80 ≧ G> 50 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1488, in step 1489, the limited frequency change mode determination means MN52 is in the first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). Determine the variation mode (variation time) about the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming side random number and the result of the lottery with reference to the main gaming table 3, and shift to the next processing {processing of step 1417 (second modification 3)} Do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1488, in step 1490, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c, and the counter value G falls within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10 in this example). It is determined whether or not the value of. In the case of Yes in step 1490, in step 1492 the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency table A-2 in the limited frequency variation mode determining lottery table MN52ta, and the main game side random number, the result of the winning lottery, Based on the number of balls held on the second main game side, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main gaming symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 1417 (second modification 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1490, in step 1494, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency table A-3 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and the main gaming side random number Based on the result, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main gaming symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1417 (the second variation 3)}. Note that the process of the steps 1488 to 1494 is a process of determining the variation mode relating to the similar short specific game.

Here, the limitation frequency table reference table in the lower part of the figure is a table in which the limitation frequency table to be referred to is summarized for each limitation frequency counter value in each specific game. As shown in the figure, when the long specifying game flag is on, the table to be referred to is switched in the order of limited frequency table A-1 → limited frequency table A-2 → limited frequency table A-3, and similar short When the specific game flag is on, the table to be referenced is switched in the order of the main game table 3 → limited frequency table A-2 → limited frequency table A-3, and when the short specific game flag is on, reference is made The table is only the main gaming table. In addition, since the limitation frequency table to be referred to at the beginning is the same in the case where the similar short specific game flag is on and the short specific game flag is on, which specific game is for the player (specific game Is difficult to determine).

  As described above, when the short specific game flag is on (after the end of the big hit related to 3A), the main game table 3 is referred to without referring to the limited frequency table A-1. Also, after the end of the time reduction game (after the 30 changes), when the long specified game flag is ON, the short specified game flag is ON while the limit frequency table A-2 is referred to The main game table 3 is to be referred to. In addition, even after the big hit ends concerning 3A, when the game state at the time of the said big hit is time shortening game state, limiting frequency table A-1 will be referred to after the big hit end .

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of limited frequency type determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second modification 3) of FIG. 50 in the third modification example from the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the limited frequency change mode determination means MN 52 determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit in the probability change gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1852, in step 1856, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 sets a predetermined number of times A (for example, 80 times) in the limited frequency counter AMN 52 c. Next, in step 1858, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 turns on the long specifying game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1438) .

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1852, in other words, when the big hit symbol is a big hit (first hit) in the normal gaming state, in step 1854, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 is the big hit in the suspension It is determined whether or not the symbol is a long specified game symbol (in this example, 7A, 7B, 5B, 3B). If Yes in step 1854, the process proceeds to step 1856.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1854, at step 1860, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol in suspension is a similar short specific gaming symbol (in this example, 5A). . In the case of Yes in step 1860, in step 1862, the limited frequency change mode determination means MN 52 sets a predetermined number of times A (for example, 80 times) in the limited frequency counter AMN 52c. Next, in step 1864, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 turns on the similar short specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1438). Do. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1860, in other words, when the big hit symbol during stoppage is a short specific symbol (in this example, 3A), at step 1866, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 is a limited frequency counter AMN 52c. A predetermined number of times B (for example, although it is illustrated that it is 30 times is illustrated, it is not limited to this. In addition, it is preferable that the number of times is smaller than the predetermined number A). Next, in step 1868, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 turns on the short specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1438). .

Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 20 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1755 (second variation), step 1784 (second variation 3) and step 1786 (second variation 3). That is, after the main game probability change flag is turned on in step 1754, in step 1755 (second change 3) and step 1763 (second), the specific game control means MP50 performs the predetermined change count MP51 c a predetermined number of times (in this example) , 80 times) and set a specific game start command (command to the sub side). Next, in step 1784 (the second modification 3), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b to determine whether the short specific game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1784 (the second variation), the process proceeds to step 1779 (the second), and the specific game control means MP50 sets the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1784 (the second variation 3) {in the case of the short specific game (that is, the jackpot symbol is 3A), in the step 1786 (the second variation 3), the specified game control means MP50 Sets the predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times) to the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1778.

  As described above, in the third modification from the second embodiment, when the short specific game flag is on (in the case after the end of the big hit related to 3A), the probability variation number counter MP51c is set 80 times, Since 30 times are set in the number counter MP52c, the number of probability variation and the number of time reductions are different.

  By changing as described above, according to the third modification from the second embodiment, the period (the number of fluctuations) in the time shortening gaming state after the special game is made different depending on the big hit symbol, and the time shortening gaming state is By referring to the same variation mode determination table in the case where a certain period is short and long, the same variation mode (and the contents of the effect) may be varied (even when the number of times of variation in the time-saving gaming state is different) Since the effect is executed, it is difficult for the player to recognize how long the running time-saving gaming state will last, and the entertainingness of the game is enhanced by executing the effect which inspires the player's expectation. It becomes.

  In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and it is not limited to this, for example, when it is a similar short specific game, the fluctuation mode and / or the fluctuation mode which are not selected when it is a short specific game are the same. May be configured to have different presentation content. In such a configuration, when symbol variation (or effect) is executed in a variation mode selected only in the similar short specific game, it is possible to play a relatively long time-saving gaming state. The person can be recognized (conversely, it may have a variation mode / effect contents selected only in the short specific game).

(Modification 4 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, after the special game is over, the game is shifted to the probability fluctuation gaming state with a limited number of times by all means, and by switching the effect of the period in the probability fluctuation gaming state in stages, the amusement of the game Was configured to improve. However, in the configuration of the second embodiment, the player's sense of expectation can not be obtained in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state by the jackpot symbol. Therefore, the configuration for solving such a problem is set as a fourth modification example from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 5 in the fourth modification of the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1711 (second variation 4) and step 1900 (second variation 4), and the purpose thereof is the sorting game (second large winning opening C20 having a specific area) It is to be configured to execute an open unit game). That is, in step 1711 (the second variation 4), the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the round to be executed at present is the distribution game execution round (in the present example, the second R, 4R). In the case of Yes in step 1711 (the second modification), the allotment game execution control means MP36 executes the sorting game execution processing described later in step 1900 (the second modification), and shifts to step 1734. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1711 (the second variation 4), the process proceeds to step 1712 and executes the same processing as this embodiment. Although not particularly illustrated in this example, in the gaming machine according to the fourth modification of the second embodiment, since the rounds for executing the sorting game are the second R and the fourth R, when a big hit is made with any of the symbols Even if, the minimum number of rounds in the special game is set to 4 rounds so that any of the distribution game execution rounds (second and fourth R) can be executed (the distribution game which is not performed will be present) It is preferable to configure such a number of rounds of special games not to be set.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1900 (second variation 4) of FIG. 54 in the fourth variation of the second embodiment. First, at step 1902, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the distribution game underway flag is on. If Yes in step 1902, the process moves to step 1916. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1902, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b at step 1904, and the stopped main game symbol is a long opening symbol (5A, 5B,. It is determined whether or not 7A · 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1904, in step 1906, the distribution game execution control means MP36 has a long open pattern (for example, open for 15 seconds) as the open pattern of the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. Then, the open pattern (designed to make the ball entering the specific area C22 deterministic) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1910. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1904 (that is, when the stopped main game symbol is 3A / 3B), at step 1908, the sorting game execution control means MP36 has the second large having the specific area C22 A short opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern designed to be open for 0.1 seconds and decided to be non-entering a specific area C22) as an opening pattern of the winning opening C20. Is set, and the process moves to step 1910.

  Next, in step 1910, the allotment game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1912, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1914, the allotment game execution control means MP36 opens the second large winning opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1916.

  Next, in step 1916, the allotment game execution control means MP36 checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not the predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won in the second large winning opening C20. Do. If Yes in step 1916, then the process transitions to step 1920. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1916, the allotment game execution control means MP36 determines at step 1918 whether or not the open period (set open pattern) of the second large winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1918, then the process transitions to step 1920. Next, in step 1920, the allotment game execution control means MP36 closes the second large winning opening C20. Next, in step 1922, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game in progress flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1924, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes in step 1924, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b in step 1926, and shifts to step 1928 . Also in the case of No at step 1924, the process proceeds to step 1928. Next, in step 1928, the allotment game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the allotment game), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1734). Also in the case of No at step 1918, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1734).

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 20 in the fourth modification of the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is the step 1788 (second variant), the step 1789 (second variant), the step 1790 (second variant) and the step 1792 (second variant), and The purpose is, in the sorting game to be executed in the second embodiment, whether the transition to the probability variation gaming state and the upper limit value of the number of variations in the time-saving gaming state are different depending on whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area C22. It is to That is, in step 1788 (the second modification), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 1788 (the second change), in step 1789 (the second change), the specified game control means MP50 is a main game probability change shift reservation flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b. And go to step 1754. On the other hand, after setting the specific game start command (command to the sub side) in step 1763 (second), in step 1790 (second change 4), the specific game control means MP50 performs a predetermined number of times on the limited frequency counter MN52c. (In this example, 80 times) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1778.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1788 (second change 4), in step 1792 (second change 4), the specific game control means MP50 causes the time reduction counter MP52c to perform a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), (Not limited to this) and move to step 1778. As described above, in the fourth modification from the second embodiment, when there is no detection of the gaming ball in the specific area C22 during the special game, the limitation frequency A flag is not turned on, and the limitation frequency state In the case where the game ball is detected in the specific area C22, the number of time saving times is different. In addition, the different number of times ("80-50 = 30 times") is equal to the number of changes (30 times) staying in the first stage.

  As described above, according to the fourth modification from the second embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the execution of the special game by the presence or absence of the game ball to the specific area in the special game In the gaming machine (so-called, ball certainty type gaming machine), if it is the probability fluctuation gaming state, it is determined (transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state with entering the ball in the specific area and not transitioning to the probability fluctuation gaming state without entering the ball) Depending on the player's profit mode, by making the fluctuation mode (and effect) in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state when there is no different from the fluctuation mode (and effect) in the probability fluctuation gaming state, An appropriate rendition can be performed. In addition, although it does not show in particular in this example, when performing a distribution game, the special effect (The effect which asks about whether the 2nd big winning a prize mouth C20 becomes long opening, the entry to the specific field C22 It may be configured such that an effect for asking whether or not a ball is played, an effect for notifying that the ball has been entered into the specific area C22, etc.) may be executed {not specifically limited to the execution mode, for example When it is the effect of notifying that the ball is entered into the specific area C22, it is preferable that the effect display device SG or the effect display device SG be at the timing when the ball is entered (preferably immediately after). It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a rendering device (for example, a so-called movable object, a light guide plate, etc.) provided on the front surface (for example, on the rendering display device SG) Display or play an image drawn as "V" The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}.

Further, in the fourth modification from the second embodiment, there are a plurality of opening modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second large winning opening is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit game which can be opened for a first time (preferably, less than or equal to one firing interval of game balls) and a predetermined time after opening for the first time The second unit game can be opened (or closed) again for a second time that is longer than the first time after closing the time. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time with a low degree of expectation to the probability change transition is finished, the probability It is possible to have the possibility that a second time opening operation with a high degree of expectation for transition is performed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time is equal to or greater than or equal to one firing interval of game balls, in order to secure entry to a specific area, (half of the upper limit winning number of the round concerned) × (games) It is more preferable that it is more than or more than one firing interval of the ball, and it is particularly preferable that it is more than or more than (upper limit winning number of the round concerned) × (one firing interval of the game ball).

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the second embodiment to the second embodiment, a limitation frequency table of three stages ("first stage → second stage → third stage") at the limitation frequency A. As an example of changing the execution mode of the prefetching effect (or prefetch lottery) in such a configuration, (1) dedicated prefetching effect exists in each stage, (2 3.) There is a common look-ahead effect in a plurality of stages, (3) the frequency of occurrence of a look-ahead effect is reduced in any of the stages compared to other stages, (4) one or more stages (eg, two stages) In the eye), the prefetch lottery may be executed, but in the other stages (for example, the first stage and the third stage), the prefetch lottery may not be executed. Further, it may be configured that the execution mode of the prefetching effect (or the prefetching lottery) may differ depending on the stop symbol (decided stop symbol) relating to the suspension to be the object of the prefetch lottery, and the prefetching rendering in such a configuration As an execution mode of (or pre-reading lottery), (A) it becomes the execution mode of the pre-reading effect (or pre-drawing lottery) of the above-mentioned (1)-(3) only when stop symbol is "HF". B) Pre-reading lottery can be executed only when the stop symbol is "HF" (C) When the stop symbol is "HF", the probability of the stop symbol being higher than in the case of "HD" or "HE" The pre-read lottery is executed (or, it is easy to win the pre-read lottery), and the like.

  In addition, the effect generated at any of the stages may be generated also when it is not in the limited frequency state.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the second embodiment to the second embodiment, when switching from the staying stage being stayed to the next rendering stage, the final change of the staying stage being stayed It may be configured to be able to execute an effect dedicated to switching of the stay stage (representation indicating that the stage is switched). In such a configuration, it is desirable that the configuration be made such that a variation time for executing the effect is secured with reference to a dedicated table (stage switching table) when the effect is to be performed. In addition, in the final change of the stay stage, a dedicated change mode may be selected only at the time of losing, and in hit, a normal hit presentation in the stay stage may be performed, and such a configuration So, it is easy for the player who sees the effect for the first time to understand the switching of the effect, and for the player who is familiar with the effect, the outcome of the final change can be predicted by the effect of the final change of the stay stage. Interest will be enhanced. In addition, using the special variation pattern in the final stage change of the stay stage, even in the case of a big hit in the final change of the stay stage, substantially the same effect as the stage switching effect is executed, and after the effect ( Alternatively, it may be configured to be able to execute a jackpot effect on the way.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, although the effect is executed during the change time of the main game symbol determined with reference to the change aspect determination lottery table, the period in which the effect can be executed is not limited to this. . Therefore, the third embodiment is a configuration which can execute the effect other than during the variation time of the main gaming symbol determined with reference to the variation mode determination lottery table, and the detailed description will be made only on the differences from the present embodiment. Describe.

First, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) or (2) of FIG. 9 in the third embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the present embodiment is step 1930 (third), step 1950 (third) and step 1443 (third) to step 1447 (third), the purpose of which is the so-called fluctuation fixed time (main game Although the symbol is displayed in a definite stop, it is a period during which a new symbol variation is not started during this period, and it is a time to make it easy to recognize the type of the main gaming symbol that is displayed in the definite stop) To provide In the third embodiment, the condition that "the fluctuation fixed time is not in progress" is added as the fluctuation start condition of the main gaming symbol.

First, after execution of the processing of step 1450, step 1500 or step 1416, in step 1930 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C execute fluctuation additional information control processing described later. Next, in step 1950 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C execute a fluctuation fixed time determination process described later, step 141
Migrate to 8 As described above, in this example, when the fluctuation start condition relating to the fluctuation of the main gaming symbol is satisfied, the fluctuation fixed time relating to the fluctuation is determined. On the other hand, after the fluctuating flag is turned off in step 1434, in step 1444 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are the variations determined in step 1950 (third). The fixed time is set to the variable fixed time timer MP12t and the timer is started. Next, at step 1445 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is in the process of being fixed in the flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The flag is turned on, and the process goes to step 1446 (third).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1426, in step 1443 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Is checked to determine whether the variable fixed flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1443 (third), the process proceeds to step 1446 (third), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

Next, in step 1446 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C,
The variable fixed time timer MP12t is referenced to determine whether the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1446 (third), in step 1447 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are for the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11 b-C. The variable fixed flag in the flag area is turned off, and the process goes to step 1436. In the case of No at step 1446 (third), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the variable additional time control process according to the subroutine of step 1930 (third) of FIG. 57 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1931, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a specific game related information temporary storage means MB
Referring to the flag area of 30b, it is determined whether the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time short flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1931, in step 1932, the first and second main game symbol control means MP 11 -C are the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB 1.
With reference to 1b-C, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the variation is the additional big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that can add a variation addition time, and in this example, 3A, 4A, 5A). If Yes in step 1932, then the process proceeds to step 1938.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1932, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C in step 1933 and It is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a small hit symbol (in this example, 1K / 2K). In the case of Yes in step 1933, the process proceeds to step 1938, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1950 (third process)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 1931, in step 1934, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game probability change flag is on and It is determined whether the main game time short flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1934, in step 1935, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the variation concerned It is determined whether or not the latent probability variation big hit symbol (in this example, 3A). In the case of Yes in step 1935, the process proceeds to step 1938. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1935, at step 1936, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are the first and second ones.
With reference to the main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the variation is a small hit symbol (1K · 2K in this example). If Yes in step 1936, then the process proceeds to step 1938. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1936, the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 1950 (third)} (a fluctuation addition time is not added even when the stop symbol of the fluctuation is 4A or 5A).

Next, in step 1938, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, in the fluctuation time of the fluctuation determined in step 1450 or step 1416, the fluctuation addition time (when the predetermined condition is satisfied Time added to the determined fluctuation time, and in this example, 20 seconds) is added. Next, at step 1940, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-
C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, the stop symbol of the variation is a predetermined jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that can be transferred to the awakening stage, in this example 4A · · It is determined whether it is 5A). In the case of Yes in step 1940, in step 1942, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is an awakening stage transition notification effect execution command (action to notify the player that the awakening stage is to be transferred to the awakening A command to execute stage transition notification effect is set (sent to sub sub control unit SS side in display command transmission control processing of step 2999), and the next processing {processing of step 1950 (third)} Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1940, that is, in the case where the stop symbol of the variation is the latent probability variation big hit symbol (in this example, 3A) or the small hit symbol (1K · 2K), in step 1944 The game symbol control means MP11-C sets a demon stage transition informing effect execution command (a command for executing the devil stage transition informing effect which is an effect for notifying the player that the devil stage is to be in transition) (step 2999 In the display command transmission control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process {step 1950 (third process)}.

  In this example, when the stop symbol of the change is "3A" at step 1944, it is configured to execute the demon stage transition notification effect, but in the probability change gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state When the stop symbol of the change becomes "3A", after transition to the probability change game state and the time reduction game state after the end of the special game related to the "3A", the fact that the transition to the "probable change stage" You may comprise so that the production | presentation to alert | report may be performed. In addition, even when the stop symbol of the fluctuation becomes "3A" in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening after the special game according to the "3A" is over It may be configured to shift to the game state. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may transfer to a non-time shortening gaming state after the special game which concerns on "4A" and "5A" symbol completion.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third) of FIG. 57 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1952, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the variation relates to the first main game side. It is determined whether or not it is fluctuation. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1956, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the variation concerned It is determined whether or not "HB". In the case of Yes in step 1956, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, in step 1958, set the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation for the first long time (long time of the fluctuation relating to the first main game In this example, it is determined to be 1.1 seconds, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1956, in step 1960, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation for the first short time (short of fluctuation related to the first main game It is a fluctuation fixed time which becomes time, and in this example, it is determined to be 0.8 seconds, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are for the second period of time during which the fluctuation is fixed.
It is the fluctuation fixed time concerning the 2nd main game, and it is decided to 0.5 seconds in this example, and it shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1418).

  Here, the lower part of the same figure is a fluctuation fixed time production execution image figure. As shown in the figure, in this example, the effect that can be executed during the fluctuation fixed time is configured to be executable only when the fluctuation fixed time can be secured for the time value of the first long time (1.1 seconds) (Because the effect for 1.1 seconds is executed). Therefore, the effect during the fluctuation fixing time is executed only when the fluctuation fixing time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), and the fluctuation fixing time is the first short time (0.8 seconds) or the second time In the case of 0.5 seconds, the effect is not executed after the fluctuation stop timing of the decorative symbol in the fluctuation (the effect is not executed during the fluctuation fixed time). The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effects with different execution times to be executed during the fluctuation fixed time may be provided, and whether or not the plural effects can be executed may be determined based on the fluctuation fixed time determined.

  In this example, two types of fixed fluctuation time concerning "1.1 second" and "0.8 seconds" are provided according to the first main game side, and fluctuation fixed time according to the second main game side There is one type of "0.5 seconds", and the fluctuation fixed time according to the second main game side is the shortest. Also, in this example, the time value from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the next fluctuation, which is the sum of the fluctuation time which can be determined and the fluctuation fixed time, is the time value of the first main game and the time of the second main game. It is configured not to be the same as the value. Further, although not shown, in the case of two fluctuations, when the fluctuation fixed time is different, the fluctuation mode and the effect mode are configured to be different. Moreover, only when the stop symbol of the change is "HB", the change fixed time of the first main game side is configured to be the first long time (1.1 seconds), and the change time in that case is It is configured that it is easy to become long time (if the main game time short flag is off, only fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is selected) (because it can be selected only in case of HB), fluctuation time is long The background effect in the event of becoming is "normal background → reach background → normal background", and an effect for transitioning from reach background to normal background will be executed in the fluctuation fixed time (1.1 seconds) . In addition, when the fluctuation fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), the time when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the background in general than in the first short time (0.8 seconds) May be configured to be relatively short, for example, (1) when the variation fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during reach background Time, but in the normal background after that while it is a variable fixed time, in the case of the first short time (0.8 seconds), there is a time when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the normal background (2) When the fluctuation fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), while the decorative symbol in the normal background after reach background is temporarily stopped is 0.1 seconds while In the case of 1 short time (0.8 seconds), the time when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped at the normal background is 0.4 seconds (3) When the variation fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), the time when the decorative pattern in the normal background after reach background is temporarily stopped, and the variation fixed time is the first short time (0 (8 seconds), it may be configured such that the time when the decorative pattern in the normal background after reach background is temporarily stopped is the same time.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2700 (third). That is, after determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol in step 2306, in step 2700 (third), the display display content determination means SM21n executes effect content determination processing during additional time, which will be described later. Transition to 2308.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of additional-time effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 (third) of FIG. 60 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2702, the drawing display content determination means SM 21 n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM 11 b and determines whether or not an awake stage transition notification effect execution command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the graphic display content determining means SM21n is executed during the addition time {during the added fluctuation addition time (in this example, the latter 20 seconds of the fluctuation time). Set awakening stage transition notification effect (showing effect to notify transition to the awakening stage) as the effect to be displayed} (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and next Processing (processing of step 2308). On the other hand, if the result of step 2702 is No, in step 2706, the graphic display content determination means SM21 n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b, and whether or not the demon stage transition notification effect execution command is received from the main side. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the graphic display content determination means SM21n is executed during the addition time {during the added variation addition time (in this example, the latter half 20 seconds of the variation time). Set the demon stage transition notification effect (effect to notify that it will shift to the demon stage) as the effect to be performed} (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and next Processing (processing of step 2308). Also in the case of No in step 2706, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2308).

  Here, the lower part of the same figure is a transition stage notification effect image figure. In the figure, after the fluctuation time is determined to be 60 seconds, the fluctuation added with 20 seconds as the fluctuation addition time is illustrated. As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol variation starts, and after 60 seconds, the button challenge symbol ("the world" symbol) stops as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the middle row. Immediately after that, an effect prompting the user to press the sub input button SB is displayed (in this example, continuous hit effect), and either the awakening stage transition notification effect or the demon stage transition notification effect based on the big hit symbol (or small hit symbol). Run. Incidentally, after the execution of the awakening stage transition notification effect execution, the transition to the awakening stage is performed, and after the execution of the demon stage transition notification effect execution, the transition to the demon stage is performed, and after the stay stage is completed, the present gaming state is notified. In addition, as the number of times of change staying in the awakening stage and the devil stage increases, the probability of being in the probability fluctuation gaming state is increased (the probability of being in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state is lowered). . In addition, in the configuration in which the fluctuation addition time is not provided, as an effect mode in the case of executing an effect for transitioning to the awakening stage or the demon stage, (1) chances (eg, even-numbered faded eyes such as 246) during the fluctuation The combination of the stop pattern of the special decorative symbol) stops (2) After the effect when the decorative symbol is stopped can not be seen with the effect of the screen breaking effect (the background effect or the display of the decorative symbol etc. with the glass breaking effect, It becomes an effect of transitioning to an awakening stage or a devil stage), (3) does not execute a button continuous hit effect, and the like.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, after the variation mode of the main gaming symbol is determined, the variation addition time can be added, and the time value is set under a predetermined condition. By providing a plurality of variable fixed times which may be different and providing an effect dedicated to the variable additional time and the variable fixed time, the interest of the game is enhanced.

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the variation fixed time can be different depending on whether or not it is the variation related to the first main game side, and the type of stop symbol related to loss, but the variation fixed time is determined The conditions are not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration is taken as a first modification of the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third modification 1) of FIG. 57 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 1964, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game time short flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 1964, in step 1966, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11 b-C and hold the second main game It is determined whether or not there is a hold in which the variation mode group becomes group C. If Yes in step 1966, in step 1967, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C execute a fixed time change lottery in which the player wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10). Next, at step 1968, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C.
The CPU refers to the lottery result and determines whether or not the lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1968, in step 1970, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to a specific time (3 seconds in this example), and the next process It transfers to (the process of step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1966 or step 1968, in step 1971, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are short in time and short in time (0.5 seconds in this example). ) And move on to the next processing (processing of step 1418).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1964, in step 1972, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the first main game is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a hold in which the variation mode group becomes group 3 within the game hold. In the case of Yes in step 1972, in step 1973, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C execute fixed time change lottery winning with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5) (
In the time reduction gaming state, compared with the non-time reduction gaming state, the fluctuation fixed time is relatively short because the fluctuation time is relatively short, and the winning rate of the lottery is longer than the time reduction gaming state. In the case of non-time saving gaming state is higher). Next, in step 1974, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the lottery result to determine whether or not the lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1974, in step 1976, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation is specified time (in this example,
3 seconds), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1972 or step 1974, at step 1978, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C does not fix the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation for a short time (0.8 in this example). Second)
To the next process (the process of step 1418).

  As described above, in this example, the fluctuation fixed time is configured to be different depending on the gaming state, and the selection probability is different depending on the gaming state as well as a specific fluctuation fixed time (specific time, 3 seconds in this example) It is configured. In addition, when the fixed time change lottery is won, the fixed fluctuation time before the fluctuation related to the hold that triggered the execution of the lottery is set as a specific time (3 seconds in this example) (or high probability) It may be configured to be a specific time). In addition, in the case of winning the fixed time change lottery, all of the fluctuation fixed time before the fluctuation related to the suspension caused the execution of the lottery may be a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) It may be a short time by probability). By configuring as such, it is possible to shorten the time until the start of the fluctuation related to the hold that is the trigger of the lottery.

  Although not illustrated, the effects performed during the fluctuation fixed time of the specific time are movie effects (effects for displaying moving images) and freeze effects (image which is suddenly darkened on the effect display device SG are displayed It is desirable to execute such an effect that the player has a sense of expectation that there will be a jackpot in the suspension, such as an effect).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, when the specific variation mode group is determined, the player can be varied by configuring the variation fixed time to be the specific time. By recognizing that the fixed time is the specific time, it is possible to have an expectation that the big hit expected hold exists within the hold, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Also, in this example, the fluctuation time is divided into two blocks of A block which is a period before reaching reach fluctuation and B block which is a period after reaching reach fluctuation, and The variation addition time and / or the variation fixed time may be added to form one variation.

  Further, in this example, the fluctuation fixed time is set to be a long time (a time equivalent to the fluctuation time to reach, for example, 30 seconds), and the reach effect can be performed during the fluctuation fixed time. May be Alternatively, reach effect may be performed in the fluctuation time, and pseudo reach effect may be performed in the fluctuation fixed time, as fluctuation time <fluctuation fixed time. For example, the fluctuation fixed time is 90 seconds and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol related to the fluctuation time is "123" which is the special stop combination (the above-mentioned chance eye) ("4.04" The left and right rows may be the same stop symbol, and the middle stop symbol may be a special symbol), and then it is determined whether the change is a big hit or a loss at the fixed change time thereafter. The effect is performed such that the decorative symbol stop pattern becomes “444”.

  Further, in this example, as the number of reservations increases, it may be configured such that the fluctuation fixing time of a short time is easily selected as the fluctuation fixing time.

  Moreover, in this example, since the success / failure result, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number division information related to the suspension can be transmitted to the sub side when the suspension occurs, the occurrence of the suspension Even in the case where the gaming state is different between the time of day and the time of the settlement of the occurring hold, it is possible to determine whether or not the success / failure result and the variation mode group are the same (whether or not they are different). Therefore, even when the gaming state is different between the occurrence of the hold and the settlement of the hold that has occurred when the success or failure result and the variation mode group are the same, the pre-reading effect may be executed across the gaming state. Depending on the type of pre-reading effect to be executed, the pre-reading effect may or may not be performed across the gaming state.

  Also, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided, and pre-reading effects in which executability is different depending on the variation state of trigger suspension and pre-reading effect that can be executed regardless of the variation mode of trigger suspension may be provided. Also, a plurality of pre-reading effects may be generated simultaneously, or a plurality of pre-reading effects may be started simultaneously at the start of the pre-reading effect, and another pre-reading effect is started during execution of one pre-reading effect May be configured to In addition, the timing of rank increase of the pre-reading effect (for example, the expectation of the big hit is increased, for example, the pending display color changes to "blue → red") may be executed simultaneously, or ranks at different timing for each pre-reading effect. It may be configured to be up. In addition, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided, for example, pre-reading effects in which the pending display mode changes, chance eye-reading effects, background suggesting a big hit expected degree by stop appearance eyes (combination of stop patterns) of decorative symbols A change pre-reading effect, a countdown notice pre-reading effect, etc. may be provided. In addition, the plurality of pre-reading effects are the type or combination of pre-reading effects that can occur simultaneously, the rank-up degree (one step UP, two steps UP, not UP) when any occurs, the display mode that appears first The jackpot expectation, etc. may be configured to be able to differ depending on the symbol etc. scheduled to be stopped according to the suspension that triggered the pre-reading lottery, for example, when performing pre-reading effect according to “HC”, pre-reading according to “HB” There may be more types or combinations of pre-reading effects that can occur simultaneously, more rank-up degree when any occurs, a display mode with a high probability of big hit, or the like, which is likely to appear first, etc. .

  In the present embodiment, although the pre-reading lottery is not executed when the trigger holding exists in the holding, the condition for not executing the pre-reading drawing is not limited to this, for example, reach within the holding The pre-reading lottery may be configured not to be executed when there is a hold that is a fluctuation (a fluctuation of the main gaming symbol that is to execute reach effect).

  In addition, as a configuration of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the main gaming symbol is displayed once after repeating “temporary stop display → re-variation (so-called pseudo variation) of the left, middle and right symbols” a plurality of times during one variation of the main gaming symbol. By stopping the gaming symbol, it is possible to execute the pseudo continuous variation, which is a rendering technique to show the player as if the main gaming symbol has been varied a plurality of times during one change of the main gaming symbol. You may In addition, when configured as such, during the execution of the pre-reading effect, the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not executed as the effect during the fluctuation related to the suspension which is digested before the trigger suspension, but as the effect during the fluctuation related to the trigger suspension It may be configured to be able to perform pseudo continuous variation.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the additional configurations shown in the above embodiments are of course added to these concepts, as well as the combination and separation (superordinate conceptization) of these listed concepts. May be

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means for executing a yes / no determination based on the first random number and determining the stop display mode of the first identification information and the variation display mode of the first identification information based on the yes / no determination result Means MN),
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means for executing a yes / no determination based on the second random number and determining the stop display mode of the second identification information and the variation display mode of the second identification information based on the determination result Means MN),
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
After the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is displayed and stopped , And special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game which can make a variable winning hole (for example, the first large winning hole C10 and the second large winning hole C20) advantageous for the player Equipped with
When the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the number of types according to the stop display mode of the first identification information is the stop of the second identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is non-winning More than the number of types related to the display mode,
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term relatively easily.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no determination A first game content determination unit (for example, game content determination unit MN) that determines the display mode and the variation display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed based on the second random number according to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no decision Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
After the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is displayed and stopped , And special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game which can make a variable winning hole (for example, the first large winning hole C10 and the second large winning hole C20) advantageous for the player Equipped with
When the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the number of types according to the stop display mode of the first identification information is the stop of the second identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is non-winning More than the number of types related to the display mode,
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the variation display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the corresponding first hold While the average value concerning the fluctuation display period of the first identification information may be different according to the number of the first suspension remaining at the time of satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information regarding
In the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the first hold is satisfied, the corresponding first hold The average value concerning the fluctuation display period of the first identification information is configured to be uniform regardless of the number of the first suspension remaining when the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information regarding is satisfied. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
Variable winning openings that can be opened and closed (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C
20) and
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no determination A first game content determination unit (for example, game content determination unit MN) that determines the display mode and the variation display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed based on the second random number according to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no decision Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
After the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is displayed and stopped , And special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game which can make a variable winning hole (for example, the first large winning hole C10 and the second large winning hole C20) advantageous for the player Equipped with
When the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the number of types according to the stop display mode of the first identification information is the stop of the second identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is non-winning More than the number of types related to the display mode,
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the variation display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the corresponding first hold While the average value concerning the fluctuation display period of the first identification information may be different according to the number of the first suspension remaining at the time of satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information regarding
In the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the first hold is satisfied, the corresponding first hold The average value of the first identification information during the fluctuation display period is configured to be uniform regardless of the number of first reservations remaining when the first identification information fluctuation display start condition is satisfied.
As a gaming state depending upon at least determining the variation display mode of the first identification information, a normal variation state and a specific variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display aspect of the first identification information is different compared to the normal variation state Have,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the first suspension is satisfied in the normal fluctuation state, While the average value concerning the fluctuation display period of the first identification information may differ according to the number of the first suspension remaining at the time of satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first suspension If the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied in the normal change state. The average value concerning the fluctuation display period of the first identification information becomes uniform regardless of the number of the first suspension remaining at the time of satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first suspension. ,
In the specific change state, when the change display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the stop display form of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display form A, The average value of the first identification information during the fluctuation display period becomes uniform regardless of the number of the first suspension remaining when the first identification information fluctuation display start condition for the first suspension is satisfied. If the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied in the specific change state. The average value concerning the fluctuation display period of the first identification information is assumed to be uniform regardless of the number of the first suspension remaining at the time of satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first suspension. Is configured to be A pachinko game machine, wherein the door.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no determination A first game content determination unit (for example, game content determination unit MN) that determines the display mode and the variation display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed based on the second random number according to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no decision Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
After the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is displayed and stopped , And special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game which can make a variable winning hole (for example, the first large winning hole C10 and the second large winning hole C20) advantageous for the player Equipped with
When the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the number of types according to the stop display mode of the first identification information is the stop of the second identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is non-winning More than the number of types related to the display mode,
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the variation display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the corresponding first hold While the average value concerning the fluctuation display period of the first identification information may be different according to the number of the first suspension remaining at the time of satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information regarding
In the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the first hold is satisfied, the corresponding first hold The average value of the first identification information during the fluctuation display period is configured to be uniform regardless of the number of first reservations remaining when the first identification information fluctuation display start condition is satisfied.
After the first hold occurs, before the variation display start condition of the first identification information related to the first hold is satisfied, the player plays the pre-reading information indicating the presence of the first hold to the player. Can be suggested or informed in advance to
Variation display of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied As a group according to the aspect, the variation display mode of the first identification information is a predetermined type according to the number of the first suspension remaining when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first suspension is satisfied. Remains at the time of satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information stop display mode A corresponding to the first identification information stop display mode A when non-winning can be selected whether it is selected or not Regardless of the number of pending first holdings, it is determined that the variable display mode of the first identification information is selected from among the specific types. Have,
Variation display of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied In the aspect, the variation display mode of the first identification information is a prescribed type regardless of the number of the first suspension remaining at the time of satisfying the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first suspension. It is decided to be selected from
In the case where the variation indication start condition of the first identification information on the certain first hold is satisfied before the variation indication start condition of the first identification information on the certain suspension is satisfied after the occurrence of the first suspension In the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information scheduled to be determined in advance is determined, the prior determination result is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B In this case, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured such that the conditions for suggesting or notifying the player of the reserved pre-reading information in advance are different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (5) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no determination A first game content determination unit (for example, game content determination unit MN) that determines the display mode and the variation display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example,
The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed based on the second random number according to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no decision Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
After the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is displayed and stopped , And special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game which can make a variable winning hole (for example, the first large winning hole C10 and the second large winning hole C20) advantageous for the player Equipped with
When the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information is plural, and the second identification when the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is non-winning The number of types concerning the stop display mode of information is also plural,
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. B and at the time of non-winning first identification information stop display mode C at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode C is configured to be relatively easy to be long-termed,
As a type according to the stop display mode of the second identification information in the case where the success or failure judgment result based on the second random number is non-win, the second identification information stop display mode A at non-win and the second identification information stop display mode at non-win B and at the time of non-winning second identification information stop display mode C,
The game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) has the easy opening state where the variable member is more likely to be open than the easy opening state and the easy opening state. Yes,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the non-opening easy state, the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information The variation display mode of the first identification information according to which one of the case of the stop display mode B and the case of the stop display mode of the first identification information becoming the first identification information stop display mode C when not winning The selection tendency of is different,
When the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A in the case of the easy-to-open state, the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop The variation display mode of the second identification information according to which of the display mode B and the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode C. The selection tendency is different,
When the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A when the non-opening easy state, the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information The variation display mode of the second identification information regardless of whether the stop display mode B of the second identification information or the second identification information stop display mode C of the second identification information does not occur The selection tendency of the variation display mode of the second identification information according to whether the selection tendency is the same or the relation is not relatively different compared to the case of the easy-to-open state,
When the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the first identification information is different,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the variation display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the corresponding first hold While the average value concerning the fluctuation display period of the first identification information may be different according to the number of the first suspension remaining at the time of satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information regarding
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning first identification information stop display mode when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied In the case of C, the variable display period of the first identification information is concerned regardless of the number of the first hold remaining at the time of satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first hold. The average value becomes uniform,
When the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the second identification information is different,
When the stop display mode of the second identification information becomes the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A when the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to the second hold is satisfied, the second stop pending While the average value concerning the fluctuation display period of the second identification information may be different according to the number of the second suspension remaining at the time of satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the second identification information regarding
The stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning second identification information stop display mode when the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied In the case of C, the variable display period of the second identification information relates to the variable display period of the second identification information regardless of the number of second holds remaining at the time of satisfying the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold. The average value is configured to be uniform,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode B. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode C is configured to be relatively easy to be relatively long, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is not winning second The second identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the second identification information becomes the non-winning second identification information stop display mode C than the fluctuation display period of the second identification information in the case of the identification information stop display mode B The variable display period is configured to be relatively long-term,
The stop display mode of the first identification information in the case where the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning becomes the first identification information stop display mode B at non-winning time than the first identification information stop display mode at non-winning state. It is configured to be difficult and to be less likely to become the first identification information stop display mode C at the non-winning time than at the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B,
The stop display mode of the second identification information in the case where the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is non-winning becomes the second identification information stop display mode B at non-winning time than the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is difficult and is more difficult to become the non-winning second identification information stop display mode C than the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B.
The selection tendency in the above includes one derived from a fluctuation pattern and one derived from the number of reservations. When derived from the fluctuation pattern, the selected fluctuation pattern, type, etc. are different, while when derived from the number of reservations, whether it depends or does not depend on the number of remaining reservations at the time of holding digestion, Either one may be adopted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying identification information;
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 20) for acquiring a random number based on entering the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit (for example, the random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 20), the acquired random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that a hold occurs. Random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30);
When the variable display start condition of identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the change display manner of the stop display mode of identification information and the identification information Game content determination means (eg, game content determination means MN) for determining
In accordance with the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), the identification information is stopped and displayed Identification information display control means (eg, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) to control;
After the success / failure determination result based on the random number is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) is made advantageous for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games to be acquired,
As a type relating to the stop display mode of the identification information in the case where the success / failure determination result based on the random number is non-win, at least the non-win selection information stop display mode A and the non-win Yes,
Discrimination in the case where the stop display mode of the identification information becomes the non-winning identification information stop display mode B than the variation display period of the identification information when the stop display mode of the identification information becomes the non-winning identification information stop display mode A The fluctuation display period of information is configured to be relatively long-term,
Indicate to the player in advance the pending prefetch information indicating to the player the existence of the certain pending before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding the certain pending after the certain pending occurs. It can be reported,
Stop display of the identification information scheduled when the variable display start condition of the identification information about the certain hold is satisfied before the variable display start condition of the identification information about the certain hold is satisfied after the certain hold occurs If the mode is determined in advance and the result of the prior determination is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B, the pre-determined information may be suggested or notified to the player in advance while the preliminary determination is made. When the result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A, the player does not suggest or inform the player of the reserved pre-reading information in advance, or the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured such that the frequency of suggesting or notifying the player of the holding pre-reading information in advance is relatively reduced as compared with the case of the mode B. That.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying identification information;
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 20) for acquiring a random number based on entering the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit (for example, the random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 20), the acquired random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that a hold occurs. Random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30);
When the variable display start condition of identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the change display manner of the stop display mode of identification information and the identification information Game content determination means (eg, game content determination means MN) for determining
In accordance with the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), the identification information is stopped and displayed Identification information display control means (eg, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) to control;
After the success / failure determination result based on the random number is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) is made advantageous for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games to be acquired,
The non-winning identification information stop display mode A, the non-winning identification information stop display mode B, and the non-winning identification information At least stop display mode C,
Discrimination in the case where the stop display mode of the identification information becomes the non-winning identification information stop display mode C than the variation display period of the identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the identification information becomes the non-winning identification information stop display mode A The fluctuation display period of information is configured to be relatively long-term,
When the stop display mode of the identification information becomes the non-winning identification information stop display mode A when the variation display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain hold While the average value of the variable display period of the identification information may differ depending on the number of reservations remaining when the above is satisfied,
In the case where the stop display mode of the identification information becomes the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C when the variation display start condition of the identification information regarding the certain storage is satisfied, the relevant suspension is The average value concerning the fluctuation display period of the identification information is configured to be uniform, regardless of the number of reservations remaining when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information regarding is satisfied.
Indicate to the player in advance the pending prefetch information indicating to the player the existence of the certain pending before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding the certain pending after the certain pending occurs. It can be reported,
Stop display of the identification information scheduled when the variable display start condition of the identification information about the certain hold is satisfied before the variable display start condition of the identification information about the certain hold is satisfied after the certain hold occurs In the case where the mode is determined in advance, and the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the player is suggested in advance the above-mentioned suspension pre-reading information to the player. Alternatively, if the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A while the notification may be made, the player does not suggest or inform the player of the reserved pre-reading information in advance, or Compared with the case where the determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the frequency at which the above-mentioned suspension pre-reading information is suggested or notified in advance to the player In the case where it is configured to decrease relatively, and in the case where the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B and in the case where the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode C The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine, which is configured to differ in the frequency of suggesting or notifying the player of the hold pre-reading information in advance.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means for executing a yes / no determination based on the first random number and determining the stop display mode of the first identification information and the variation display mode of the first identification information based on the yes / no determination result Means MN),
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means for executing a yes / no determination based on the second random number and determining the stop display mode of the second identification information and the variation display mode of the second identification information based on the determination result Means MN),
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
After the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is displayed and stopped , And special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game which can make a variable winning hole (for example, the first large winning hole C10 and the second large winning hole C20) advantageous for the player Equipped with
When the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information is plural, and the second identification when the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is non-winning The number of types concerning the stop display mode of information is also plural,
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term,
As a type according to the stop display mode of the second identification information in the case where the success or failure judgment result based on the second random number is non-win, the second identification information stop display mode A at non-win and the second identification information stop display mode at non-win And B at least,
More than the variation display period of the second identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the second identification information becomes the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification The variation display period of the second identification information in the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively easy to be long-termed,
The game state related to the openability of the variable member includes the non-openable state and the easy-to-open state in which the variable member is more likely to be open than the non-openable state,
In the case of the easy-to-open state and in the case of the easy-to-open state rather than the fluctuation display period of the second identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B and It is configured that the variation display period of the second identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the second identification information becomes the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B is relatively easy to be a short period. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the following.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no determination A first game content determination unit (for example, game content determination unit MN) that determines the display mode and the variation display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed based on the second random number according to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no decision Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) Second identification information display control means (for example,
The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is displayed and stopped , And special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game which can make a variable winning hole (for example, the first large winning hole C10 and the second large winning hole C20) advantageous for the player Equipped with
When the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information is plural, and the second identification when the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is non-winning The number of types concerning the stop display mode of information is also plural,
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term,
As a type according to the stop display mode of the second identification information in the case where the success or failure judgment result based on the second random number is non-win, the second identification information stop display mode A at non-win and the second identification information stop display mode at non-win And B at least,
The game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) has the easy opening state where the variable member is more likely to be open than the easy opening state and the easy opening state. Yes,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first state. Depending on which of the identification information stop display mode B is selected, the selection tendency of the variable display mode of the first identification information differs,
When the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, and when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning state Depending on which of the information stop display mode B is selected, the selection tendency of the variable display mode of the second identification information differs,
The second variation in which the selection tendency of the variation display manner of the second identification information is different as compared to the first variation state and the first variation state as the gaming state depending on at least determining the variation display aspect of the second identification information The game state transition from the first fluctuation state to the second fluctuation state can be generated during the period in which the state is held and the easy opening state is maintained,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A in the case of the easy opening state and the first change state, the selection tendency of the first identification information change display mode and When the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A in the case of the easy opening state and the second change state, the selection tendency of the first identification information change display mode And a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured differently.
The selection tendency in the above includes one derived from a fluctuation pattern and one derived from the number of reservations. When derived from the fluctuation pattern, the selected fluctuation pattern, type, etc. are different, while when derived from the number of reservations, whether it depends or does not depend on the number of remaining reservations at the time of holding digestion, Either one may be adopted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no determination A first game content determination unit (for example, game content determination unit MN) that determines the display mode and the variation display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed based on the second random number according to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the yes / no decision Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
After the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is displayed and stopped , And special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game which can make a variable winning hole (for example, the first large winning hole C10 and the second large winning hole C20) advantageous for the player Equipped with
When the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information is plural, and the second identification when the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is non-winning The number of types concerning the stop display mode of information is also plural,
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term,
As a type according to the stop display mode of the second identification information in the case where the success or failure judgment result based on the second random number is non-win, the second identification information stop display mode A at non-win and the second identification information stop display mode at non-win And B at least,
More than the variation display period of the second identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the second identification information becomes the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification The variation display period of the second identification information in the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively easy to be long-termed,
The game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) has the easy opening state where the variable member is more likely to be open than the easy opening state and the easy opening state. Yes,
In the case of the easy-to-open state and in the case of the easy-to-open state rather than the fluctuation display period of the second identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B and When the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B, the variation display period of the second identification information is configured to be relatively short.
When the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first state. Depending on which of the identification information stop display mode B is selected, the selection tendency of the variable display mode of the first identification information differs,
When the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, and when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning state Depending on which of the information stop display mode B is selected, the selection tendency of the variable display mode of the second identification information differs,
The second variation in which the selection tendency of the variation display manner of the second identification information is different as compared to the first variation state and the first variation state as the gaming state depending on at least determining the variation display aspect of the second identification information The game state transition from the first fluctuation state to the second fluctuation state can be generated during the period in which the state is held and the easy opening state is maintained,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A in the case of the easy opening state and the first change state, the selection tendency of the first identification information change display mode and When the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A in the case of the easy opening state and the second change state, the selection tendency of the first identification information change display mode And a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured differently.
The selection tendency in the above includes one derived from a fluctuation pattern and one derived from the number of reservations. When derived from the fluctuation pattern, the selected fluctuation pattern, type, etc. are different, while when derived from the number of reservations, whether it depends or does not depend on the number of remaining reservations at the time of holding digestion, Either one may be adopted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (11) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls display control of effects;
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number, and the stop display mode of the first identification information and the variation display mode of the first identification information First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed on the basis of the second random number, and the stop display mode of the second identification information and the variation display mode of the second identification information Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
A period during which the first identification information is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period from the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed is a period during which the first identification information is variably displayed within the predetermined period. The second identification information is suspended for a specific period different from the predetermined period from the first identification information display fixed period, which is a period in which the condition can not be newly satisfied, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A second identification information display fixed period, which is a period for maintaining the displayed state, in which the variable display start condition of the second identification information can not be newly satisfied in the specific period may be provided. Is configured as
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M);
Effect display control means (for example, control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
1st identification information display fixed period will be provided effect display contents displayed during the fluctuation display of the first identification information, and 2nd identification information variable display will be provided with the second identification information display fixed period It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the effect display content displayed in the inside is configured to be the same effect display content.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (12) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
And a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number, and the stop display mode of the first identification information and the variation display mode of the first identification information First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed on the basis of the second random number, and the stop display mode of the second identification information and the variation display mode of the second identification information Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term,
A period during which the first identification information is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period from the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed is a period during which the first identification information is variably displayed within the predetermined period. The first identification information display fixed period, which is a period when the condition can not be newly satisfied, and the second identification information is maintained for a specified period from the time when the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A second identification information display fixed period in which the variable display start condition of the second identification information can not be newly satisfied within the specific period.
The first identification information display fixed period provided when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first identification information display fixed period provided in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be a different period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (13) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
It is a variable member attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the predetermined entrance (for example, , The second main game start opening B10) is a game ball entering the ball or easier to enter compared to the closed state, when it is shifted to the closed state the predetermined ball entry (for example, the second main game start opening A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter in B10) as compared to the game ball unable to enter or open in B10),
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls display control of effects;
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on entry to the starting opening;
Game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that executes a yes / no decision based on the random number and decides a stop display mode of identification information and a variation display mode of identification information based on the yes / no decision result;
Identification information display control means (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit according to the determination by the game content determination means;
After the success / failure determination result based on the random number is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) is made advantageous for the player. If it is possible to execute the special game to be obtained and the stop display mode of the identification information is a mode of a predetermined type, the predetermined to the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) A first special game that executes a unit game that can open a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) a plurality of times until there is a number of entry or a predetermined period elapses If the stop display mode of the identification information is a specific type of mode different from the predetermined type of mode, to the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) There is a predetermined number of balls entered or a predetermined period A special game control means (for example, a second special game that executes a unit game that can open a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) once) Special game control means MP30),
The low probability lottery state in which the success or failure judgment result is won with a predetermined probability, and the high probability lottery state in which the success or failure judgment result is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, Is controlled so that the gaming state related to the low probability lottery state and the high probability lottery state may change, while before and after the second special game is executed, the gaming state related to the low probability lottery state and the high probability lottery state changes Lottery state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) to control not to
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
As an execution content of the first special game, one of the first high profit special game in which the expected number of balls is a predetermined number and the first low profit special game in which the expected number of balls is smaller than the predetermined number is executed. Is possible,
When the stop display mode of the identification information is the first stop display mode of the predetermined type modes, the high probability lottery state is entered after the first high profit special game is executed, and the stop display mode of the identification information is In the case of the second stop display mode of the predetermined type of mode, the low probability lottery state is entered after the first low profit special game is executed, and the stop display mode of the identification information is one of the modes of the predetermined type In the third stop display mode, the high probability lottery state is configured after the first low profit special game is executed,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit;
Effect display control means (for example, control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
After the special game is executed on the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side, it is possible to display predetermined effect display content, and when the predetermined effect display content is displayed, the identification information The period from when the variable display is changed to the stop display is taken as one unit, and after the predetermined effect display content is displayed, the predetermined effect is calculated until the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches the predetermined number. The display content is configured to be displayed continuously, and
When a special game is executed because the stop display mode of the identification information is the first stop display mode on the main game unit (for example, main control board M) side, the main game unit (for example, main control When the special game is executed because the stop display mode of the identification information is the second stop display mode on the substrate M) side, the identification information on the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side When the special game is executed because the stop display mode of the third stop display mode is the stop display mode of the identification information on the side of the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side When a special game is executed due to being a specific type of aspect, it is configured to be able to display the effect display content common to any of them as the predetermined effect display content,
It is a numerical value that indicates or indicates a period during which the predetermined effect display content is continuously displayed after the special game is executed on the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side, and the numerical value is large. It is configured to set, as the predetermined number of times, a numerical value determined such that the degree of expectation for becoming a high probability lottery state becomes high after the special game is executed.
After the special game is executed on the side of the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M), the predetermined effect display content is started to be displayed, and the number of repetitions of one unit has reached the predetermined number A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that, from then on, the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side is configured to inform the player in a definite manner whether or not the high probability lottery state is established. It is.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (14) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls display control of effects;
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number, and the stop display mode of the first identification information and the variation display mode of the first identification information First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed on the basis of the second random number, and the stop display mode of the second identification information and the variation display mode of the second identification information Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term,
A period during which the first identification information is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period from the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed is a period during which the first identification information is variably displayed within the predetermined period. The second identification information is suspended for a specific period different from the predetermined period from the first identification information display fixed period, which is a period in which the condition can not be newly satisfied, and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A second identification information display fixed period, which is a period for maintaining the displayed state, in which the variable display start condition of the second identification information can not be newly satisfied within the specific period. Yes,
The first identification information display fixed period takes at least one of the first period and the second period longer than the first period, and the first identification information display fixed period is fixed to the second identification information display. It is configured to be relatively longer than the period,
At least the second period can be taken as the first identification information display fixed period in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode B when not winning.
Even if the variation display period of the first identification information and the variation display period of the second identification information are the same in the predetermined gaming state, the first identification information display fixed period and the second identification information display fixed period Are configured differently, and
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M);
Effect display control means (for example, control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
In the case where the first identification information display fixed period takes the first period and in the case where the first identification information display fixed period takes the second period, an effect displayed within the first identification information display fixed period A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the display contents can be varied.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
And an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, the random number temporary storage means (temporarily stores the first and second random numbers) which temporarily stores the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C),
When the variable display start condition of identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the change display manner of the stop display mode of identification information and the identification information Game content determination means (eg, game content determination means MN) for determining
Identification information display control means (for example, a first one) for controlling to stop the identification information after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit according to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN) · A second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C),
A period during which the identification information is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period from when the identification information is displayed in a stopped state, and the variation display start condition of the identification information is newly satisfied within the predetermined period. An identification information display fixed period, which is an impossible period, is provided.
The game contents scheduled when the variable display start condition of the identification information about the certain hold is satisfied are determined in advance before the variable display start condition of the identification information about the certain hold is satisfied after the certain hold occurs. Pachinko is characterized in that it is possible to vary the identification information display fixed period provided before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding the certain hold based on the result of the prior determination. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (16) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
Identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display section A21g, second
With main game symbol display section B 21 g),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) which controls the progress of the game;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls display control of effects;
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10);
Random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means) temporarily storing the obtained random numbers as hold until the random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 20) acquires random numbers until the yes / no decision permission condition is satisfied MJ30),
If it satisfies the yes or no decision permission conditions, the success or failure judgment means (for example, the success or failure lottery means MN10) that executes the yes or no judgment based on the random number,
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the success / failure determination;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display of stop identification information after fluctuating display;
If the result of the success or failure judgment is winning, the player is displayed after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to
There is a low probability lottery state in which the result of the success or failure judgment is won with a predetermined probability, and a high probability lottery state in which the result of the success or failure judgment is more likely to be won than the predetermined probability. In the high probability lottery state, it is controlled to be in the high probability lottery state, and from the variable display start to the stop display of the identification information is taken as one unit, and counted after the end of the execution of the special game, the one unit repeated Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to be in a low probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times,
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second variation in which the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is the second period different from the first period Control to have at least a period state, and to be able to be in a first variation period state in a specific period in the high probability lottery state after the end of the special game execution, and in the first variation period state, the execution of the special game ends Fluctuation period state control means (for example, limited frequency fluctuation mode determination) which can be controlled to be the second fluctuation period state after reaching a specific number of times where the number of repetitions of the unit is less than the predetermined number Means MN 52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side, satisfying satisfaction determination permission conditions Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information on not being held to the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side,
In the case of the first change period state, the number of reservations at the time of fulfilling the qualification decision permission condition is the first number of reservations, and the number of reservations at the time of satisfaction of the qualification decision permission condition is the first suspension In the case of the second pending number which is larger than the number, the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information in the case where the result of the success / failure determination at the time of satisfying the relevant failure determination permission condition While mean difference occurs,
In the case of the second variation period state, the satisfaction determination permission condition is satisfied as an average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information in the case where the result of the qualification determination when satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is not won. The average value difference for the predetermined period according to the number of reservations at the time is not generated (or smaller than the average value difference in the first variation period state),
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Gaming information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving the gaming information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M);
When the information regarding the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the received hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition And hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, pre-waiting read effect execution control means SM26) for controlling so as to be able to display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) ,
If it is planned to reach the specific number of times by execution of the one unit related to the suspension occurring in the first fluctuation period state, the content of the reservation ahead read presentation effect is displayed in the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it can be made non-displayable in SG).

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ 10 ball landing judgment means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start opening entrance ball judgment means MJ11-B 2nd main game start entrance entrance ball judgment means, MJ11-H auxiliary game entrance ball entrance entrance judgment means MJ11-C10 1st big prize entrance entrance ball judgment Means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning a prize entrance sphere determination means MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H assistance Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 reserve control means, MJ31 reserve digestion control means MJ31 j variation start condition satisfaction determination means, MJ32 symbol reserve means MJ32-A first main game symbol reserve means, MJ32b-A first main game symbol reserve information Memory means MJ32-B second main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-B second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32-H auxiliary game pattern maintenance Means, MJ 32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MN game content determination means, MN 10 yes or no lottery means MN11-A first main game success or failure lottery means, MN11ta-A first main game success or failure lottery table MN11-B second Main game winning lottery means, MN11ta-B second main gaming winning lottery table MN11-H auxiliary game winning lottery means, MN11ta-H auxiliary gaming success lottery table MN20 special game transition determining means, MN40 symbol contents determining means MN41-A 1st main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B 2nd main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination Means, MN41ta-H Lottery table MN50 for auxiliary game symbol determination Change mode determination Stage, MN51-A 1st main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B 2nd main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery Table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H lottery table for auxiliary game variation mode determination, MN52 limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52ta limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table, MN52c limited frequency counter AMN52c-2 limited frequency counter B, MN 52b limited frequency related information temporary storage means MP game progress means, MP10 display control means MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means, MP11t-C first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11- H auxiliary gaming symbol control means, MP11t-H auxiliary gaming symbol variation management Timer MP20-B 2nd main game start opening electric combination opening and closing control means, MP21-B 2nd main game start opening electric combination opening and closing condition determination means MP22t-B 2nd main game start opening electric combination opening timer, MP30 Special Game control means MP31 Condition judgment means, MP32 Special game content determination means MP32ta Special game content reference table, MP33 Special game execution means MP33-C 1st and 2nd big winning opening electric combination opening and closing control means, MP33c Winning ball counter MP34 Special Game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP40 small hit game control means, MP41t small hit game timer MP40b small hit game related information temporary storage means, MP50 specific game control means MP51 probability variation end condition determination means, MP52 time end condition judgment Means MP52c time shorting counter, MB gaming state temporary note Means MB10-C first and second main gaming state temporary storage means, MB11b-C first and second main gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means, MB11b-H auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage Means MB20b special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b specific game related information temporary storage means MT information transmission control means MT10 buffer for command transmission, MH award ball payout determination means A first main game peripheral device, A10 first main game start opening A11s 1st main game start slot entering ball detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display A21g 1st main game symbol display, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display B 2nd main game peripheral, B10 2nd main Game start opening B11s second main game start opening entrance ball detection device, B11 d second main game start opening electric role thing B20 second main game symbol display device, B21 2nd main game symbol display area B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display area, C 1st · 2nd main game common peripheral device C10 1st big winning opening, C11s 1st big winning opening prize detection device C11d 1st big winning opening Motorized role, C20 2nd winning opening C21s 2nd winning opening winning detection device, C21d 2nd winning opening motorized role H auxiliary gaming peripherals, H10 auxiliary gaming start opening H11s auxiliary gaming start opening entrance detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21 g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21 h auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM10 Display Information Receiving Means, SM11b Main Side Information Temporary Storage Means SM20 Effect Display Control Means, SM21 Decorative Symbol Display Control Means SM21n Dressing Display Content Determination Means, SM21ta Drawing Variation Content Determination Lottery Table SM21b Dressing Related Information Temporary Storage Means , SM21t drawing fluctuation time management timer SM22 drawing holding information display control means, SM22b drawing holding information temporary storage means SM26 holding pre-reading effect execution control means, SM26 k holding pre-reading effect execution possibility judging means SM26 b pre-reading related information temporary storage means, SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM23c Awake stage stay counter, SM23c-2 Devil stage stay counter SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notification effect display content determination unit SM24b notice production related information temporary storage unit, SM25 reach effect display control unit SM25n reach effect display content determination unit, SM25b reach effect related information temporary storage unit SM40 information transmission / reception control unit SS effect display unit (sub sub control unit , SS10 Sub information transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21 b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Effect display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative symbol display area, SG12 1st hold display section SG13 2nd hold display section KH award Ball dispensing control board KE winning ball dispensing device

Claims (1)

The first starting port where game balls can enter
The second starting port where game balls can enter
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening, which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is shifted to the open state, the gaming ball can enter the second starting opening as compared to the ball can enter or close A variable member which is configured so that it is easy and difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting opening as compared to the inability to enter the ball or the open state when displaced to the closed state;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first starting opening;
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the yes / no determination is performed based on the first random number, and the stop display mode of the first identification information and the variation display mode of the first identification information First game content determination means for determining
First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening;
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, a yes / no determination is performed on the basis of the second random number, and the stop display mode of the second identification information and the variation display mode of the second identification information Second game content determination means for determining
The second identification information display control means is controlled to cause the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means,
The first identification information stop display mode A at the non-winning time and the first identification information stop display mode at the non-election time as a type related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is non-winning. And B at least,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected when the stop display mode of the first identification information is not selected than the variation display period of the first identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A. The variation display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long-term,
A period during which the first identification information is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period from the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed is a period during which the first identification information is variably displayed within the predetermined period. The first identification information display fixed period, which is a period when the condition can not be newly satisfied, and the second identification information is maintained for a specified period from the time when the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A second identification information display fixed period in which the variable display start condition of the second identification information can not be newly satisfied within the specific period.
The first identification information display fixed period provided when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first identification information display fixed period provided in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be a different period.

Images